1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Index idx
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
504 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
515 \begin_layout Chapter
516 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
520 \begin_layout Section
521 Basic File Operations
522 \begin_inset Index idx
525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
534 \begin_layout Standard
539 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
540 in addition to some more advanced operations:
543 \begin_layout Itemize
565 \begin_layout Itemize
581 arg "buffer-new-template"
587 \begin_layout Itemize
609 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
633 \begin_layout Itemize
655 \begin_layout Itemize
667 arg "buffer-write-as"
673 \begin_layout Itemize
687 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \begin_layout Standard
702 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
703 a few minor differences.
706 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
717 command lists the available templates.
718 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
719 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
720 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
728 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
735 \begin_layout Standard
736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
769 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
770 is just that — a big, blank space.
778 \begin_layout Standard
799 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
804 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
807 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
825 will reload the document from disk.
826 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
827 and want to restore it to the last save.
836 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
837 them as your changes.
840 \begin_layout Section
841 Basic Editing Features
842 \begin_inset Index idx
845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
854 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
861 \begin_layout Standard
862 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
863 can perform cut and paste operations
864 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
865 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
866 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
867 editing features and how to access
869 We will start with cut and paste.
872 \begin_layout Standard
873 As you might expect, the
877 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
878 various other editing features.
879 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
883 \begin_layout Itemize
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
921 \begin_layout Itemize
927 \begin_inset Index idx
930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 \begin_layout Itemize
965 \begin_inset Index idx
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1007 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1017 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset Index idx
1030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1039 \begin_inset Index idx
1042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1057 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1067 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1073 \begin_layout Standard
1074 The first three are self-explanatory.
1075 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1076 and other programs by
1097 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1098 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1103 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1104 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1105 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1106 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1107 into individual cells.
1111 \begin_inset space ~
1116 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1117 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1121 \begin_layout Standard
1125 \begin_inset space ~
1130 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1132 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1147 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1148 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1149 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1155 \begin_inset space \space{}
1158 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1159 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1162 \begin_inset space ~
1165 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1184 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1185 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1187 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1191 \begin_inset space ~
1196 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1197 start a new paragraph.
1198 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1199 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1204 \begin_inset space ~
1207 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1224 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1227 paste from the primary selection.
1228 This is normally the currently selected text.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 \begin_inset space ~
1240 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1258 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1264 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1281 button to skip the current word.
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1301 If the toggle is set, searching for
1302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1313 will not match the word
1314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1328 Match whole words only
1330 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1331 to only find complete words, e.
1332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1361 offers also an advanced
1364 \begin_inset space ~
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1373 feature that is described in sec.
1374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1380 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1387 \begin_layout Standard
1388 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1389 \begin_inset space \space{}
1393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1403 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1408 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1419 arg "inset-select-all"
1422 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1423 When the cursor is inside an inset
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 selects the content of the inset.
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1441 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1444 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1448 \begin_layout Section
1450 \begin_inset Index idx
1453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1460 \begin_inset Index idx
1463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1472 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1479 \begin_layout Standard
1480 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1482 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1488 or the toolbar button
1494 to undo some mistake.
1495 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1497 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1500 or the toolbar button
1507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1514 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1518 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1521 \begin_layout Standard
1522 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1532 This is a consequence of the 100
1533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1536 step undo limit mentioned above.
1539 \begin_layout Standard
1548 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1550 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1554 \begin_layout Section
1556 \begin_inset Index idx
1559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1572 \begin_layout Enumerate
1577 \begin_layout Itemize
1582 once anywhere in the edit window.
1583 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1587 \begin_layout Enumerate
1592 \begin_layout Itemize
1599 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1605 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1606 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1609 \begin_layout Itemize
1610 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1620 \begin_layout Enumerate
1621 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1625 \begin_layout Standard
1626 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1627 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1631 \begin_layout Section
1633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1635 name "sec:Navigating"
1640 \begin_inset Index idx
1643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1652 \begin_layout Standard
1654 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1663 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1669 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1671 \begin_inset space ~
1676 or by the toolbar button
1679 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1685 \begin_layout Itemize
1686 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1691 and use the same menu to return to them.
1692 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1695 \begin_layout Standard
1699 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1704 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1705 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 \begin_inset space ~
1712 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1713 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1714 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1715 your last editing position.
1718 \begin_layout Standard
1723 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1727 \begin_layout Subsection
1729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1731 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1736 \begin_inset Index idx
1739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1740 Navigating ! Outline
1746 \begin_inset Index idx
1749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1759 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1760 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1761 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1769 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1773 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1780 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1785 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1790 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1791 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1792 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1793 dialog and to modify the citation.
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1799 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1800 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1808 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1811 \begin_layout Standard
1812 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1813 you further to control the display.
1818 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1819 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1825 option keeps it in the current view state.
1826 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1827 \begin_inset space ~
1830 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1831 \begin_inset space ~
1834 3, the subsections of sections
1835 \begin_inset space ~
1838 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1843 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1848 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1858 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1861 \begin_layout Standard
1868 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1869 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1883 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1884 So, for example, you can move section
1885 \begin_inset space ~
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1892 2.4 or after section
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1898 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 (or the corresponding key bindings
1919 ) you can change the level of sections.
1920 So you can for example make section
1921 \begin_inset space ~
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1935 \begin_layout Section
1936 Input/Word Completion
1937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1939 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1944 \begin_inset Index idx
1947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1954 \begin_inset Index idx
1957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Standard
1990 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1992 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1993 is used to propose completions.
1996 \begin_layout Standard
1997 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2000 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2005 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2016 \begin_inset space ~
2021 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2030 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2031 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2041 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2042 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2043 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2044 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2047 \begin_layout Standard
2049 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2050 completions available.
2055 key to accept a proposed completion.
2056 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2057 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2058 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2065 \begin_layout Standard
2066 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2067 ing options for text.
2068 The special math option
2072 enables characters to be composed.
2073 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2074 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2077 , you can then input the characters
2078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2089 to a formula to get it.
2090 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2091 of the math toolbar.
2092 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2096 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2097 's installation folder.
2098 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2107 \begin_layout Section
2109 \begin_inset Index idx
2112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2119 \begin_inset Index idx
2122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2151 \begin_inset Index idx
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2185 \begin_layout Standard
2186 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2200 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2203 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2207 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2214 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2221 \begin_layout Standard
2225 \begin_inset space ~
2233 \begin_inset space ~
2254 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2258 \begin_layout Labeling
2259 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2263 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2264 LatexCommand nomenclature
2266 description "Tabulator key"
2272 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2274 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2275 \begin_inset space ~
2279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2281 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2288 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2292 , especially section
2293 \begin_inset space ~
2297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2299 reference "subsec:Lists"
2305 If you are still confused, look in the
2310 \begin_inset Newline newline
2318 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2319 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2323 \begin_layout Labeling
2324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2328 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2329 LatexCommand nomenclature
2331 description "Escape key"
2338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2345 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2346 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2349 \begin_layout Labeling
2350 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2356 \begin_inset space ~
2360 \begin_inset space ~
2367 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2368 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2372 \begin_layout Standard
2373 There are three modifier keys:
2376 \begin_layout Labeling
2377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2395 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2396 LatexCommand nomenclature
2398 description "Control key"
2402 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2403 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2407 \begin_layout Itemize
2416 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2419 \begin_layout Itemize
2428 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2431 \begin_layout Itemize
2440 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2444 \begin_layout Labeling
2445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2463 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2464 LatexCommand nomenclature
2466 description "Shift key"
2470 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2471 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2474 \begin_layout Labeling
2475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2493 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2494 LatexCommand nomenclature
2496 description "Alt or Meta key"
2500 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2501 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2502 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2508 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2513 menu accelerator keys
2516 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2517 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2521 \begin_layout Standard
2522 For example, the sequence
2523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2529 \begin_inset space ~
2533 \begin_inset space ~
2539 \begin_inset space ~
2547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2566 \begin_inset space ~
2572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2582 \begin_layout Standard
2587 manual lists all other things bound to the
2595 \begin_layout Standard
2596 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2598 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2599 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2600 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2601 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2602 The \SpecialChar LyX
2603 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2604 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2605 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2607 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2623 followed by a capital
2630 \begin_layout Chapter
2633 \begin_inset Index idx
2636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_layout Section
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_layout Subsection
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2665 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2666 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2667 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2668 numbering schemes, and so on.
2669 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2670 and format the title of your document differently.
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2678 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2679 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2680 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2681 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2682 picks one for you by default.
2683 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2686 \begin_layout Subsection
2688 \begin_inset Index idx
2691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2700 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2707 \begin_layout Standard
2708 You can select a class using the
2710 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2711 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2715 \begin_inset Index idx
2718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2725 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2729 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2733 \begin_layout Standard
2734 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2739 \begin_layout Description
2740 Article for basic articles
2743 \begin_layout Description
2744 Report for basic reports
2747 \begin_layout Description
2748 Book for writing a book
2751 \begin_layout Description
2752 Letter for US-style letters
2755 \begin_layout Standard
2756 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2757 only uses if you have installed
2758 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2759 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2760 distributions will include
2762 Here are some of the classes.
2763 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2765 Special Document Classes
2774 \begin_layout Description
2775 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2788 \begin_layout Description
2789 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2790 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2791 There are three article layouts available.
2792 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2793 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2794 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2795 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2800 sequential numbering
2801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2804 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2805 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2806 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2807 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2810 \begin_layout Description
2811 Beamer Layout for presentations
2814 \begin_layout Description
2815 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2816 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2817 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2818 with \SpecialChar LyX
2822 \begin_layout Description
2823 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2826 \begin_layout Description
2828 \begin_inset space ~
2831 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2834 \begin_layout Description
2835 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2838 \begin_layout Description
2839 Foils Used to make transparencies
2842 \begin_layout Description
2843 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2844 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2845 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2846 with \SpecialChar LyX
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2852 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2855 \begin_layout Description
2856 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2859 \begin_layout Description
2860 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2863 \begin_layout Description
2864 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2865 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2866 (Is used by this document.)
2869 \begin_layout Description
2870 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2873 \begin_layout Description
2874 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2877 \begin_layout Description
2882 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2883 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2885 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2889 \begin_layout Description
2890 Slides Used to make transparencies
2893 \begin_layout Description
2895 \begin_inset space ~
2898 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2899 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2902 \begin_layout Description
2903 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2906 \begin_layout Standard
2907 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2909 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
2911 Special Document Classes
2918 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2919 of the document classes.
2922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2926 \begin_layout Standard
2927 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2929 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2930 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2932 \begin_inset Index idx
2935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2952 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2953 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2955 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2958 \begin_layout Standard
2961 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2966 , are highly specialized.
2968 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2969 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2970 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2971 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2972 by some document class.
2973 There are just too many of them.
2974 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2977 \begin_layout Standard
2978 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2986 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2987 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2988 document class for a new file.
2990 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2993 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3000 manual for information on how to install them.
3001 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3007 \begin_layout Standard
3008 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3009 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3010 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3011 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3012 class files to be used for dissertation
3013 s submitted to those universities.
3014 The \SpecialChar LyX
3015 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3017 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3021 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3027 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3030 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3034 name "subsec:Modules"
3039 \begin_inset Index idx
3042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3051 \begin_layout Standard
3052 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3053 chosen document class.
3054 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3055 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3062 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3066 \begin_inset Index idx
3069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3076 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3080 \begin_layout Standard
3081 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3082 packages or file format converters that are not always
3083 installed by default.
3085 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3086 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3087 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3088 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3090 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3091 file without the missing prerequisites.
3092 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3093 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3096 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3100 \begin_inset Index idx
3103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3104 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3110 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3115 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3118 \begin_layout Standard
3119 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3127 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3129 will advise you about these things.
3137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3141 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3146 \begin_inset Index idx
3149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3150 Document ! Local Layout
3158 \begin_layout Standard
3159 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3160 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3161 : They are intended to be used in
3162 a variety of different documents.
3163 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3164 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3165 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3166 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3167 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3169 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3187 manual for information on how to use it.
3190 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3194 \begin_layout Standard
3195 Each class has a default set of options.
3196 Here's a quick table describing them:
3199 \begin_layout Standard
3200 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3206 \begin_layout Standard
3208 \begin_inset Tabular
3209 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3210 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3211 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3214 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3215 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3669 \begin_layout Standard
3670 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3676 \begin_layout Standard
3677 You're probably also wondering what
3678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3682 \begin_inset space ~
3686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3690 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3691 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3696 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3701 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3711 headings, there are also
3719 headings, and so on.
3720 We will describe these headings fully in section
3721 \begin_inset space ~
3725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3727 reference "subsec:Headings"
3734 \begin_layout Subsection
3736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3738 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3743 \begin_inset Index idx
3746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3753 \begin_inset Index idx
3756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3765 \begin_layout Standard
3766 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3768 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3775 \begin_inset space ~
3783 \begin_inset space ~
3788 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3790 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3791 doesn't support special options you want to
3792 use for your document.
3793 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3794 -class and its options, you have to read
3798 \begin_layout Standard
3802 \begin_inset space ~
3809 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3815 \begin_inset space ~
3820 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3821 You can choose between the following five options:
3824 \begin_layout Labeling
3825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3830 Use default page style of current class.
3833 \begin_layout Labeling
3834 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3839 No page numbers or headings.
3842 \begin_layout Labeling
3843 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3851 \begin_layout Labeling
3852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3857 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3858 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3859 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3860 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3863 \begin_layout Labeling
3864 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3869 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3870 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3876 \begin_inset Index idx
3879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3881 -packages ! fancyhdr
3887 How they are defined is explained in section
3888 \begin_inset space ~
3892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3894 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3901 \begin_layout Standard
3902 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3903 \begin_inset space ~
3907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3909 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3916 \begin_layout Subsection
3917 Paper Size and Orientation
3918 \begin_inset Index idx
3921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3922 Document ! Paper size
3928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3930 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3937 \begin_layout Standard
3938 You can find the following options in the menu
3941 \begin_inset space ~
3948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3952 \begin_inset Index idx
3955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3964 \begin_layout Labeling
3965 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3969 \begin_inset space ~
3974 What size paper to print on.
3979 \begin_layout Itemize
3985 \begin_layout Itemize
3991 \begin_layout Itemize
3997 \begin_layout Itemize
4003 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 US letter, US legal, US executive
4009 \begin_layout Itemize
4015 \begin_layout Itemize
4022 \begin_layout Labeling
4023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 To choose whether to output as
4039 \begin_layout Labeling
4040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4044 \begin_inset space ~
4049 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4050 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4053 \begin_layout Subsection
4055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4057 name "subsec:Margins"
4062 \begin_inset Index idx
4065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4084 \begin_layout Standard
4085 Paper margins are set in the menu
4087 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4091 \begin_inset Index idx
4094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4103 \begin_layout Standard
4104 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4105 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4106 the paper format and the font size into account.
4109 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 \begin_layout Standard
4114 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4120 That includes the paragraph environments.
4121 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4122 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4123 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4125 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4134 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4136 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4137 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4138 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4141 \begin_layout Section
4142 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4143 \begin_inset Index idx
4146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4147 Paragraph ! Indentation
4155 \begin_layout Subsection
4157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4159 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4166 \begin_layout Standard
4167 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4168 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4171 \begin_layout Standard
4172 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4173 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4174 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4175 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4179 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4185 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4186 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4187 language than English.
4189 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4192 \begin_layout Standard
4193 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4194 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4195 into \SpecialChar LyX
4197 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4200 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4202 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4203 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4204 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4211 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4212 goes to produce a printable file.
4217 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4219 gives you the ability globally to change
4223 these pre-coded spacings.
4224 We will explain more later.
4227 \begin_layout Subsection
4228 Paragraph Separation
4229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4231 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4236 \begin_inset Index idx
4239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4240 Paragraph ! Separation
4248 \begin_layout Standard
4256 \begin_inset space ~
4264 \begin_inset space ~
4271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4275 \begin_inset Index idx
4278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4284 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4287 \begin_layout Subsection
4291 \begin_layout Standard
4292 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4295 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4297 \begin_inset space ~
4302 dialog and toggle the
4305 \begin_inset space ~
4310 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4313 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4317 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4318 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4322 \begin_layout Standard
4323 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4324 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4327 \begin_layout Subsection
4329 \begin_inset Index idx
4332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4333 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4341 \begin_layout Standard
4344 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4348 \begin_inset Index idx
4351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4360 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4364 \begin_inset space ~
4373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4374 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4380 \begin_inset Index idx
4383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4385 -packages ! setspace
4390 installed to use this feature.
4395 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4397 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4399 \begin_inset space ~
4404 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4405 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4408 \begin_layout Section
4409 Paragraph Environments
4410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4412 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4417 \begin_inset Index idx
4420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4421 Paragraph ! Environments
4427 \begin_inset Index idx
4430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4431 Paragraph environments|(
4439 \begin_layout Subsection
4443 \begin_layout Standard
4444 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4447 \begin_layout Standard
4466 \begin_inset Newline newline
4469 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4471 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4472 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4473 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4482 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4485 \begin_layout Standard
4486 A paragraph environment is simply a
4487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4494 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4495 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4496 scheme, labels, and so on.
4497 Additionally, you can
4498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4505 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4506 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4507 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4508 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4510 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4512 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4515 \begin_layout Standard
4516 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4517 \begin_inset Graphics
4518 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4524 at the left end of the toolbar.
4526 will change the environment of the
4530 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4531 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4532 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4536 \begin_layout Standard
4545 create a new paragraph using the
4549 paragraph environment.
4551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4558 because if you are in one of these environments:
4561 \begin_layout Itemize
4567 \begin_layout Itemize
4573 \begin_layout Itemize
4579 \begin_layout Itemize
4585 \begin_layout Itemize
4591 \begin_layout Itemize
4597 \begin_layout Itemize
4603 \begin_layout Standard
4605 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4609 , rather than resetting it to
4614 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4615 \begin_inset space ~
4619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4621 reference "sec:Nesting"
4628 \begin_layout Subsection
4632 \begin_layout Standard
4633 The default paragraph environment is
4638 It creates a plain paragraph.
4640 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4641 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4642 this manual) are in the
4649 \begin_layout Standard
4650 You can nest a paragraph using the
4654 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4662 \begin_layout Subsection
4664 \begin_inset Index idx
4667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4676 \begin_layout Standard
4677 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4678 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4687 for thanks or contact information.
4688 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4689 places all of this on a separate page
4690 along with today's date.
4691 For other types of documents, the title
4692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4699 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4703 \begin_layout Standard
4705 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4719 Here's how you use them:
4722 \begin_layout Itemize
4723 Put the title of your document in the
4730 \begin_layout Itemize
4731 Put the author name in the
4738 \begin_layout Itemize
4739 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4740 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4746 Note that using this environment is optional.
4747 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4748 will automatically insert today's date.
4749 If you don't want a date, use the option
4751 Suppress default date on front page
4755 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4756 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4758 \begin_inset space ~
4766 \begin_layout Standard
4767 You can use footnotes to insert
4768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4775 or contact information.
4778 \begin_layout Subsection
4780 \begin_inset Index idx
4783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4792 name "subsec:Headings"
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4800 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4802 takes care of the numbering for you.
4805 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4807 \begin_inset Index idx
4810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4811 Section headings ! Numbered
4819 \begin_layout Standard
4820 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4824 \begin_layout Enumerate
4830 \begin_layout Enumerate
4836 \begin_layout Enumerate
4842 \begin_layout Enumerate
4848 \begin_layout Enumerate
4854 \begin_layout Enumerate
4860 \begin_layout Enumerate
4866 \begin_layout Standard
4868 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4869 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4870 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4875 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4876 You group the book into chapters.
4878 does a similar grouping:
4881 \begin_layout Itemize
4886 is divided into either
4897 \begin_layout Itemize
4909 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 \begin_layout Itemize
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4945 \begin_layout Itemize
4957 \begin_layout Standard
4958 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4966 Not all document types use the
4970 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4975 is the top-level heading.
4983 \begin_layout Standard
4988 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
4989 labels it with its number,
4990 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4992 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5006 \begin_inset Index idx
5009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5010 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5018 \begin_layout Standard
5019 The unnumbered section headings have a
5020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5027 at the end of their name.
5028 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5029 the table of contents, see section
5030 \begin_inset space ~
5034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5044 Changing the Numbering
5045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5047 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5054 \begin_layout Standard
5055 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5056 in the Table of Contents.
5057 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5059 Just as certain classes start with
5073 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5083 This is something you can change.
5086 \begin_layout Standard
5089 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5093 \begin_inset Index idx
5096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5105 \begin_inset space ~
5109 \begin_inset space ~
5114 you will see two counters.
5119 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5120 numbers a section heading.
5121 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5126 Short Titles of Headings
5127 \begin_inset Index idx
5130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5131 Section headings ! Short titles
5137 \begin_inset Argument 1
5140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5149 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5158 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5159 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5160 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5163 \begin_layout Standard
5165 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5166 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5167 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5168 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5171 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5173 \begin_inset space ~
5179 This will insert a box labeled
5180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5184 \begin_inset space ~
5188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5191 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5192 This also works for captions inside floats.
5193 There can only be one short title per title.
5196 \begin_layout Standard
5197 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5204 \begin_layout Standard
5205 The following information applies to all section headings:
5208 \begin_layout Itemize
5209 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5212 \begin_layout Itemize
5213 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5216 \begin_layout Itemize
5217 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5220 \begin_layout Itemize
5221 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5224 \begin_layout Subsection
5228 \begin_layout Standard
5230 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5244 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5245 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5246 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5247 the text they contain.
5248 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5256 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5259 \begin_layout Standard
5260 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5269 when you start a new paragraph.
5270 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5274 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5275 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5276 have to change back to the
5280 environment yourself.
5283 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5292 \begin_inset Index idx
5295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5304 \begin_layout Standard
5305 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5306 time for the differences.
5315 are identical except for one difference:
5319 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5328 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5331 \begin_layout Standard
5332 Here's an example of the
5345 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5347 See – no indentation!
5351 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5352 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5353 the other paragraph.
5356 \begin_layout Standard
5357 Here's another example, this time in the
5364 \begin_layout Quotation
5370 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5371 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5372 the first line, then
5376 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5380 you were quoting other text.
5383 \begin_layout Quotation
5384 Here's a new paragraph.
5385 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5386 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5389 \begin_layout Standard
5390 As the examples show,
5394 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5395 They should put quotes in the
5400 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5404 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5409 \begin_inset Index idx
5412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5419 \begin_inset Index idx
5422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5438 \begin_layout Standard
5443 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5449 \begin_inset Newline newline
5452 Which I did not rehearse!
5456 It could be much worse.
5457 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5459 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5460 indented a bit more than the first.
5461 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5467 \begin_inset Newline newline
5470 And make things look fine
5471 \begin_inset Newline newline
5477 arg "newline-insert newline"
5483 \begin_layout Standard
5488 does not indent both margins.
5489 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5490 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5493 arg "newline-insert newline"
5499 \begin_layout Subsection
5501 \begin_inset Index idx
5504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5520 \begin_layout Standard
5522 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5532 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5533 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5542 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5543 lets you provide your own label.
5544 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5545 describing some general features of all four of them.
5548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5555 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5556 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5565 reset the environment to
5569 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5570 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5571 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5575 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5579 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5586 \begin_layout Standard
5587 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5588 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5589 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5591 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5592 you read all of section
5593 \begin_inset space ~
5597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5599 reference "sec:Nesting"
5606 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5608 \begin_inset Index idx
5611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5627 \begin_layout Standard
5628 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5632 paragraph environment.
5633 It has the following properties:
5636 \begin_layout Itemize
5637 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5641 \begin_layout Itemize
5643 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5646 \begin_layout Itemize
5647 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5651 \begin_layout Itemize
5652 The items can have any length.
5654 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5655 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5662 \begin_layout Itemize
5667 environment inside another
5671 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5675 \begin_layout Itemize
5676 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5679 \begin_layout Itemize
5681 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5684 \begin_layout Itemize
5686 \begin_inset space ~
5690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5692 reference "sec:Nesting"
5696 for a full explanation of nesting.
5700 \begin_layout Standard
5701 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5710 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5713 \begin_layout Standard
5714 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5715 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5718 \begin_layout Itemize
5719 The label for the first level
5723 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5727 \begin_layout Itemize
5728 The label for the second level is a dash.
5732 \begin_layout Itemize
5733 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5737 \begin_layout Itemize
5738 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5742 \begin_layout Itemize
5743 Back out to the third level.
5747 \begin_layout Itemize
5748 Back to the second level.
5752 \begin_layout Itemize
5753 Back to the outermost level.
5756 \begin_layout Standard
5757 These are the default labels for an
5762 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5764 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5767 dialog in the submenu
5772 \begin_inset Index idx
5775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5781 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5785 \begin_layout Standard
5786 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5787 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5816 name "sec:Enumerate"
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5828 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5829 It has these properties:
5832 \begin_layout Enumerate
5833 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Enumerate
5838 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5842 \begin_layout Enumerate
5844 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5847 \begin_layout Enumerate
5852 environment resets the counter to one.
5855 \begin_layout Enumerate
5868 \begin_layout Enumerate
5869 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5870 Items can have any length.
5873 \begin_layout Enumerate
5874 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5877 \begin_layout Enumerate
5878 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5881 \begin_layout Enumerate
5882 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5886 \begin_layout Standard
5895 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5897 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5898 labels the four different levels in an
5905 \begin_layout Enumerate
5906 The first level of an
5910 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5914 \begin_layout Enumerate
5915 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5919 \begin_layout Enumerate
5920 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5924 \begin_layout Enumerate
5925 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5928 \begin_layout Enumerate
5929 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5934 \begin_layout Enumerate
5935 Back to the third level
5939 \begin_layout Enumerate
5940 Back to the second level.
5944 \begin_layout Enumerate
5945 Back to the outermost level.
5948 \begin_layout Standard
5949 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5953 environment, see section
5954 \begin_inset space ~
5958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5960 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
5965 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
5969 \begin_layout Standard
5970 There is more to nesting
5974 environments than we've stated here.
5975 You should read section
5976 \begin_inset space ~
5980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5982 reference "sec:Nesting"
5986 to learn more about nesting.
5989 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5991 \begin_inset Index idx
5994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6003 \begin_layout Standard
6004 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6008 list has no fixed label.
6009 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6018 of the first line as the label.
6022 \begin_layout Description
6023 Example: This is an example of the
6030 \begin_layout Standard
6032 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6036 \begin_layout Standard
6038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6045 it is meant that the first usage of the
6049 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6051 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6059 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6064 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6065 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6067 \begin_inset space ~
6073 \begin_inset space ~
6077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6079 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6083 for more information.) Here is an example:
6086 \begin_layout Description
6088 \begin_inset space ~
6091 Example: This one shows how to use a
6094 \begin_inset space ~
6106 \begin_layout Description
6107 Usage: You should use the
6111 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6112 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6114 It's not a good idea to use a
6118 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6119 You're better off using
6131 paragraphs into them.
6134 \begin_layout Description
6135 Nesting: You can nest
6139 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6143 \begin_layout Standard
6144 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6145 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6146 them from the first line.
6149 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6151 \begin_inset Index idx
6154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6163 \begin_layout Standard
6168 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6169 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6173 \begin_layout Standard
6182 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6184 Here are its properties:
6187 \begin_layout Labeling
6188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6190 \begin_inset space ~
6193 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6202 of each line as the item label.
6207 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6208 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6209 space as described above.
6212 \begin_layout Labeling
6213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6214 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6215 uses different margins for the item label and the
6216 body of the item text.
6217 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6218 label width plus a little extra space.
6222 \begin_layout Labeling
6223 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6225 \begin_inset space ~
6228 width \SpecialChar LyX
6229 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6230 If the label width is larger, the label
6231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6238 into the first line.
6239 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6240 margin of the rest of the item text.
6243 \begin_layout Labeling
6244 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6246 \begin_inset space ~
6249 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6254 environment has the same left margin.
6255 \begin_inset Newline newline
6258 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6261 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6268 dialog (toolbar button
6271 arg "layout-paragraph"
6278 \begin_inset space ~
6283 determines the default label width.
6284 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6293 multiple times instead.
6294 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6304 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6307 \begin_inset space ~
6312 every time you alter a label in a
6317 \begin_inset Newline newline
6320 The predefined default width is the length of
6321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6329 \begin_inset space ~
6335 \begin_layout Standard
6340 list the same way as the
6344 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6350 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6354 \begin_layout Standard
6359 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6360 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6362 \begin_inset space ~
6366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6368 reference "sec:Nesting"
6372 to learn about nesting.
6375 \begin_layout Standard
6376 There is yet another feature of the
6380 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6381 left-justifies the item labels by
6383 You can use additional
6387 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6388 justifies the item label.
6393 are documented in section
6394 \begin_inset space ~
6398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6400 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6405 Here are some examples:
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 Left The default for
6417 \begin_layout Labeling
6418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6419 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6426 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6429 \begin_layout Labeling
6430 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6431 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6435 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6442 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6445 \begin_layout Subsection
6447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6449 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6454 \begin_inset Index idx
6457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6466 \begin_layout Standard
6467 The features described in this section require that the module
6469 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6471 is loaded in the document settings.
6472 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6478 \begin_inset Index idx
6481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6483 -packages ! enumitem
6491 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6492 Custom Enumerate Lists
6493 \begin_inset Index idx
6496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6497 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6505 \begin_layout Standard
6507 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6513 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6514 There you add the command
6517 \begin_layout Standard
6525 \begin_layout Standard
6537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6538 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6539 Code, look at section
6540 \begin_inset space ~
6544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6546 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6559 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6566 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6567 For capital Roman numerals replace
6579 in the command above.
6580 For Arabic numerals use
6588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6595 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6610 \begin_layout Standard
6612 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6620 You can only number 26
6621 \begin_inset space ~
6624 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6632 \begin_layout Standard
6633 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6634 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6637 \begin_layout Standard
6638 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6641 \begin_layout Enumerate
6642 \begin_inset Argument 1
6645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6671 \begin_layout Enumerate
6672 \begin_inset Argument 1
6675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6698 \begin_layout Enumerate
6703 \begin_layout Enumerate
6704 \begin_inset Argument 1
6707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6731 \begin_layout Enumerate
6732 \begin_inset Argument 1
6735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6761 \begin_layout Standard
6762 For this list these commands were used:
6765 \begin_layout Standard
6776 \begin_inset Newline newline
6784 \begin_inset Newline newline
6792 \begin_inset Newline newline
6802 \begin_layout Standard
6809 makes the label emphasized and
6818 \begin_layout Standard
6819 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6827 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6828 lists until you change the definition.
6836 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6838 \begin_inset Index idx
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6842 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6850 \begin_layout Standard
6851 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6854 \begin_layout Enumerate
6855 \begin_inset Argument 1
6858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6877 \begin_inset Note Note
6880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6881 goes back to default numbering
6889 \begin_layout Enumerate
6893 \begin_layout Standard
6897 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6901 \begin_layout Standard
6902 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6907 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6908 to indicate that it is a resumed
6909 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6910 , but in the output.
6913 \begin_layout Standard
6914 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6922 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6931 \begin_layout Standard
6932 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6934 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6935 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6936 of a normal enumeration.
6937 There, insert the command
6940 \begin_layout Standard
6946 \begin_layout Standard
6951 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6955 \begin_layout Enumerate
6959 \begin_layout Enumerate
6963 \begin_layout Standard
6964 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6967 \begin_layout Enumerate
6968 \begin_inset Argument 1
6971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6987 This enumeration starts at 4
6990 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6992 \begin_inset Index idx
6995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7004 \begin_layout Standard
7005 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7007 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7010 \begin_layout Itemize
7014 \begin_layout Itemize
7015 with standard spacing
7018 \begin_layout Standard
7019 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7021 Add there the command
7025 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7028 \begin_layout Itemize
7029 \begin_inset Argument 1
7032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7051 \begin_layout Itemize
7055 \begin_layout Itemize
7059 \begin_layout Standard
7060 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7067 \begin_inset Index idx
7070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7072 -packages ! enumitem
7078 For more information see its documentation,
7079 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7089 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7091 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7092 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7096 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7099 \begin_layout Enumerate
7100 \begin_inset Argument 1
7103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7111 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7124 \begin_layout Enumerate
7125 with negative indentation
7128 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7129 Further Customization
7130 \begin_inset Index idx
7133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7134 Lists ! Customization
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7143 You can also change the style of description lists.
7147 \begin_layout Standard
7153 \begin_layout Standard
7154 changes the description label font, the command
7157 \begin_layout Standard
7163 \begin_layout Standard
7164 sets the list style.
7167 \begin_layout Standard
7168 An example where the command
7171 \begin_layout Standard
7176 itshape, style=nextline
7179 \begin_layout Standard
7183 \begin_layout Description
7185 \begin_inset space ~
7189 \begin_inset Argument 1
7192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7198 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7200 itshape, style=nextline
7210 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7211 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7215 \begin_layout Description
7217 \begin_inset space ~
7220 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7221 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7222 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7225 \begin_layout Standard
7226 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7232 \begin_inset Index idx
7235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7237 -packages ! enumitem
7243 For more information see its documentation
7244 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7253 \begin_layout Subsection
7255 \begin_inset Index idx
7258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7267 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7269 \begin_inset space ~
7272 Address: An Overview
7275 \begin_layout Standard
7276 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7277 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7285 \begin_inset space ~
7291 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7292 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7293 gags on the document.
7294 In contrast, you can use the
7301 \begin_inset space ~
7306 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7307 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7311 \begin_layout Standard
7312 Of course, you're not limited to using
7319 \begin_inset space ~
7328 \begin_inset space ~
7333 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7334 some European academic papers.
7337 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7341 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7348 \begin_layout Standard
7353 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7354 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7358 \begin_inset space ~
7363 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7364 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7365 Here's an example of each:
7368 \begin_layout Right Address
7370 \begin_inset Newline newline
7374 \begin_inset Newline newline
7378 \begin_inset Newline newline
7381 When is it? What is today?
7384 \begin_layout Standard
7388 \begin_inset space ~
7394 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7396 the largest block of text on a single line.
7397 Here's an example of the
7404 \begin_layout Address
7406 \begin_inset Newline newline
7409 Where do I send this
7410 \begin_inset Newline newline
7413 Your post office and country
7416 \begin_layout Standard
7417 As you can see, both
7424 \begin_inset space ~
7429 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7434 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7435 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7441 This makes sense, since
7449 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7450 Thus, you have to use
7457 arg "newline-insert newline"
7462 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7463 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7465 \begin_inset space ~
7469 \begin_inset space ~
7474 ) to start a new line in an
7481 \begin_inset space ~
7489 \begin_layout Subsection
7493 \begin_layout Standard
7494 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7495 or list of references.
7497 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7500 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7502 \begin_inset Index idx
7505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7514 \begin_layout Standard
7519 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7520 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7521 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7522 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7536 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7537 The book document classes ignores the
7541 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7545 in a letter document class.
7548 \begin_layout Standard
7553 environment does several things for you.
7554 First, it puts the centered label
7555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7563 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7565 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7566 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7567 the subsequent text.
7568 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7570 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7574 \begin_layout Standard
7575 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7579 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7580 The new paragraph will still be in the
7585 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7586 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7589 \begin_layout Standard
7590 \begin_inset Float figure
7595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7597 \begin_inset Graphics
7598 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7606 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7611 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7632 \begin_layout Standard
7633 We would love to demonstrate the
7637 environment, but since this document is in the
7638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7645 class, we can't do this.
7646 We inserted it therefore as figure
7647 \begin_inset space ~
7651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7653 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7658 If you have never heard of an
7659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7666 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7669 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7671 \begin_inset Index idx
7674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7683 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7690 \begin_layout Standard
7695 environment is used to list references.
7696 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7697 only use it at the end of the document.
7709 \begin_layout Standard
7710 When you first open a
7714 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7715 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7731 depending on the document class.
7732 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7733 Each paragraph of the
7737 environment is a bibliography entry.
7742 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7743 Each new paragraph is still in the
7750 \begin_layout Standard
7751 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7752 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7754 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7756 handling, have a look at section
7757 \begin_inset space ~
7761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7763 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7770 \begin_layout Subsection
7771 Special Environments
7774 \begin_layout Standard
7776 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7777 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7785 \begin_inset Index idx
7788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7798 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7805 \begin_layout Standard
7811 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7813 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7818 key as a fixed whitespace.
7822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7835 \begin_inset space ~
7840 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7858 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7861 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7864 arg "newline-insert newline"
7881 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7882 So, when you finish using the
7887 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7888 Also, you can nest the
7893 environment inside of others.
7896 \begin_layout Standard
7897 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7900 \begin_layout Itemize
7904 arg "newline-insert newline"
7907 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7912 \begin_inset space \space{}
7922 arg "newline-insert newline"
7928 \begin_layout Itemize
7932 arg "newline-insert newline"
7942 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7948 \begin_layout Itemize
7949 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7950 You must put at least one
7954 in any line you want blank.
7955 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7959 \begin_layout Itemize
7960 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7964 since that will insert
7969 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7972 arg "self-insert \""
7978 \begin_layout Standard
7982 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7986 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7990 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7994 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7998 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7999 printf("Hello World!
8004 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8008 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8012 \begin_layout Standard
8013 This is just the standard
8014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8025 \begin_layout Standard
8031 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8033 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8034 as if you used a typewriter.
8035 \begin_inset Index idx
8038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8039 Paragraph environments|)
8044 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8047 Program Code Listings
8052 \begin_inset space ~
8060 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8064 \begin_inset Index idx
8067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8076 \begin_layout Standard
8081 environment is similar to the
8086 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8087 computer console text.
8092 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8106 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8107 you can have empty lines.
8120 \begin_layout Itemize
8121 have a certain language and a text style
8124 \begin_layout Itemize
8125 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8126 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8127 and \SpecialChar TeX
8131 \begin_layout Standard
8132 Because of these properties
8136 works like a typewriter.
8140 \begin_layout Verbatim
8145 \begin_layout Verbatim
8149 The following 2 lines are empty:
8152 \begin_layout Verbatim
8156 \begin_layout Verbatim
8160 \begin_layout Verbatim
8162 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8167 \begin_layout Standard
8172 environment is identical to
8176 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8177 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8184 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8189 \begin_layout Section
8190 Nesting Environments
8191 \begin_inset Index idx
8194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8195 Nesting ! Environments
8201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8210 \begin_layout Subsection
8214 \begin_layout Standard
8216 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8218 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8220 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8222 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8234 \begin_layout Enumerate
8238 \begin_layout Enumerate
8243 \begin_layout Enumerate
8247 \begin_layout Enumerate
8252 \begin_layout Enumerate
8256 \begin_layout Standard
8257 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8258 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8260 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8262 \begin_inset space ~
8266 \begin_inset space ~
8274 \begin_inset space ~
8278 \begin_inset space ~
8283 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8285 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8288 arg "depth-increment"
8294 arg "depth-decrement"
8308 arg "depth-increment"
8314 arg "depth-decrement"
8318 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8319 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8323 \begin_layout Standard
8324 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8325 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8326 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8327 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8328 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8331 \begin_layout Standard
8332 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8334 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8336 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8339 \begin_layout Subsection
8340 What You Can and Can't Nest
8343 \begin_layout Standard
8344 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8345 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8348 \begin_layout Standard
8349 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8350 than a simple yes or no.
8351 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8354 \begin_layout Itemize
8355 Completely unnestable
8358 \begin_layout Itemize
8359 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8363 \begin_layout Itemize
8364 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8368 \begin_layout Standard
8369 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8370 environments have them:
8373 \begin_layout Description
8374 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8375 Can't nest into them.
8379 \begin_layout Itemize
8385 \begin_layout Itemize
8391 \begin_layout Itemize
8397 \begin_layout Itemize
8403 \begin_layout Itemize
8410 \begin_layout Description
8412 \begin_inset space ~
8415 Nestable You can nest them.
8416 You can nest other things into them.
8420 \begin_layout Itemize
8426 \begin_layout Itemize
8432 \begin_layout Itemize
8438 \begin_layout Itemize
8444 \begin_layout Itemize
8450 \begin_layout Itemize
8456 \begin_layout Itemize
8462 \begin_layout Itemize
8469 \begin_layout Itemize
8475 \begin_layout Itemize
8482 \begin_layout Description
8483 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8484 You can't nest anything into them.
8488 \begin_layout Itemize
8494 \begin_layout Itemize
8500 \begin_layout Itemize
8506 \begin_layout Itemize
8512 \begin_layout Itemize
8518 \begin_layout Itemize
8524 \begin_layout Itemize
8530 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 \begin_layout Itemize
8566 \begin_layout Itemize
8570 \begin_inset space ~
8576 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_layout Standard
8584 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8592 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8602 \begin_inset space ~
8605 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8606 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8607 nested section headings violate this.
8615 \begin_layout Subsection
8616 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8617 \begin_inset Index idx
8620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8621 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8629 \begin_layout Standard
8630 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8631 affected by nesting anyhow.
8635 \begin_layout Itemize
8639 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Standard
8649 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8657 Figures and tables in
8661 are not affected by this.
8666 Have a look at section
8667 \begin_inset space ~
8671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8673 reference "sec:Floats"
8677 for more information about
8684 \begin_layout Standard
8686 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8687 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8691 \begin_layout Standard
8692 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8700 of its own, it behaves just like a
8701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8708 paragraph environment.
8709 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8713 \begin_layout Standard
8714 Here's an example with a table:
8717 \begin_layout Enumerate
8722 \begin_layout Enumerate
8723 This is (a) and it's nested.
8727 \begin_layout Standard
8728 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8734 \begin_layout Standard
8736 \begin_inset Tabular
8737 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8738 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8739 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8740 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8824 \begin_layout Standard
8825 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8832 \begin_layout Enumerate
8834 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8838 \begin_layout Enumerate
8842 \begin_layout Standard
8843 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8846 \begin_layout Enumerate
8851 \begin_layout Enumerate
8852 This is (a) and it's nested.
8856 \begin_layout Standard
8857 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8863 \begin_layout Standard
8865 \begin_inset Tabular
8866 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8867 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8868 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8869 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8953 \begin_layout Standard
8954 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8960 \begin_layout Enumerate
8967 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8970 \begin_layout Enumerate
8974 \begin_layout Standard
8975 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8979 \begin_layout Standard
8980 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8983 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8986 \begin_layout Enumerate
8991 \begin_layout Enumerate
8992 This is (a) and it's nested.
8995 \begin_layout Standard
8996 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9002 \begin_layout Standard
9004 \begin_inset Tabular
9005 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9006 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9007 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9008 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9093 \begin_layout Standard
9094 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9100 \begin_layout Enumerate
9102 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9109 \begin_layout Enumerate
9113 \begin_layout Standard
9114 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9120 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9121 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9125 \begin_layout Subsection
9126 Usage and General Features
9129 \begin_layout Standard
9130 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9131 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9140 is the innermost possible depth.
9141 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9144 \begin_layout Enumerate
9145 level #1 – outermost
9149 \begin_layout Enumerate
9154 \begin_layout Enumerate
9159 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 \begin_layout Itemize
9169 \begin_layout Itemize
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9179 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9180 both of them in the example.
9181 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9191 For example, if we tried to nest another
9196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9203 , we would get errors.
9206 \begin_layout Subsection
9208 \begin_inset Index idx
9211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9220 \begin_layout Standard
9221 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9222 We have several examples of nested environments.
9223 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9228 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9231 \begin_layout Labeling
9232 \labelwidthstring MMM
9233 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9242 \begin_layout Labeling
9243 \labelwidthstring MMM
9244 #2-a This is level #2.
9245 We created it by using
9248 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9254 arg "depth-increment"
9261 \begin_layout Labeling
9262 \labelwidthstring MMM
9263 #3-a This is level #3.
9264 This time, we just enter
9271 arg "depth-increment"
9275 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9279 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9285 arg "depth-increment"
9292 \begin_layout Standard
9297 environment, nested inside of
9298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9306 So, it's at level #4.
9307 We did this by entering
9310 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9316 arg "depth-increment"
9319 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9324 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9340 \begin_layout Standard
9345 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9348 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9354 \begin_layout Labeling
9355 \labelwidthstring MMM
9356 #4-a This is level #4.
9360 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9363 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9368 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9372 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9377 keep nesting things inside
9378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9389 \begin_layout Labeling
9390 \labelwidthstring MMM
9391 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9396 \begin_layout Labeling
9397 \labelwidthstring MMM
9398 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9399 and this is level #6.
9400 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9404 \begin_layout Labeling
9405 \labelwidthstring MMM
9406 #5-b Back to level #5.
9410 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9416 arg "depth-decrement"
9423 \begin_layout Labeling
9424 \labelwidthstring MMM
9428 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9434 arg "depth-decrement"
9437 , we're back at level #4.
9441 \begin_layout Labeling
9442 \labelwidthstring MMM
9443 #3-b Back to level #3.
9444 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9448 \begin_layout Labeling
9449 \labelwidthstring MMM
9450 #2-b Back to level #2.
9455 \begin_layout Labeling
9456 \labelwidthstring MMM
9457 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9458 After this sentence, we will enter
9462 and change the paragraph environment back to
9469 \begin_layout Standard
9470 We could have also used the
9486 environment in place of the
9491 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9494 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9495 Example 2: Inheritance
9498 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9499 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9502 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9511 arg "depth-increment"
9515 \begin_inset Newline newline
9518 which, we will change to the
9526 \begin_layout Enumerate
9531 environment, at level #2.
9534 \begin_layout Enumerate
9535 Notice how the nested
9539 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9543 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9547 \begin_layout Standard
9548 We ended this example by entering
9553 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9557 and reset the nesting depth by using
9560 arg "depth-decrement"
9566 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9567 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9576 \begin_inset Argument 1
9579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9580 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9588 \begin_layout Enumerate
9589 This is level #1, in an
9593 paragraph environment.
9594 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9598 \begin_layout Enumerate
9603 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9609 arg "depth-increment"
9613 Now, what happens if we nest an
9617 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9618 label be? An asterisk?
9622 \begin_layout Itemize
9632 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9633 So, its label is a bullet.
9634 (We got here by using
9637 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9643 arg "depth-increment"
9646 , then changing the environment to
9654 \begin_layout Itemize
9655 Here's level #4, produced using
9658 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9664 arg "depth-increment"
9668 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9673 \begin_layout Enumerate
9676 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9681 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9685 , because we are in the
9693 environment (that is, it is an
9708 \begin_layout Enumerate
9713 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9714 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9718 \begin_layout Enumerate
9719 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9722 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9725 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9728 \begin_layout Enumerate
9732 arg "depth-decrement"
9735 to decrease the depth after the next
9738 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9745 \begin_layout Enumerate
9747 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9752 \begin_layout Enumerate
9754 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9755 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9759 \begin_layout Enumerate
9760 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9769 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9774 reset the counter for the label.
9778 \begin_layout Enumerate
9782 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9788 arg "depth-decrement"
9791 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9792 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9793 into the twofold-nested
9801 \begin_layout Enumerate
9802 The same thing happens if we do another
9805 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9811 arg "depth-decrement"
9814 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9817 \begin_layout Standard
9818 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9823 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9838 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9845 The same rule applies for the
9849 environment, as well.
9852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9853 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9856 \begin_layout Enumerate
9857 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9858 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9859 the same detail with how we did it.
9868 \begin_layout Standard
9876 arg "depth-increment"
9883 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9884 the example in parentheses someplace.
9885 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9886 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9887 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9891 \begin_layout Enumerate
9896 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9901 Now we will add verse.
9902 \begin_inset Newline newline
9905 It will get much worse.
9906 \begin_inset Newline newline
9916 arg "depth-increment"
9927 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9928 \begin_inset Newline newline
9931 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9932 \begin_inset Newline newline
9938 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9951 \begin_layout Standard
9952 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9958 \begin_layout Standard
9960 \begin_inset Tabular
9961 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9962 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9963 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9964 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10049 \begin_layout Verse
10053 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10063 arg "depth-increment"
10069 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10075 \begin_inset Newline newline
10083 arg "depth-decrement"
10090 \begin_layout Enumerate
10095 : level #1) This is another item.
10096 Note that selecting a
10100 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10101 3 times to put the table inside the
10109 \begin_layout Quotation
10110 We're now ending the
10114 list and changing to
10119 We're still at level #1.
10120 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10121 The next set of paragraphs is a
10122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10129 We will nest both the
10136 \begin_inset space ~
10141 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10145 for the letter body.
10149 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10152 to preserve the depth.
10153 Remember that you need to use
10156 arg "newline-insert newline"
10159 to create multiple lines inside the
10166 \begin_inset space ~
10176 \begin_layout Right Address
10178 \begin_inset Newline newline
10181 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10182 \begin_inset Newline newline
10188 \begin_layout Address
10190 \begin_inset space ~
10196 \begin_layout Quotation
10197 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10201 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10202 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10203 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10204 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10205 as soon as possible.
10206 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10209 \begin_layout Quotation
10210 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10211 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10212 with your order, along with payment.
10215 \begin_layout Quotation
10216 We thank you again for your patience.
10219 \begin_layout Address
10221 \begin_inset Newline newline
10228 \begin_layout Quotation
10229 That ends that example!
10232 \begin_layout Standard
10233 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10234 gives you a lot of power with just
10236 We could have easily nested an
10257 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10260 \begin_layout Subsection
10262 \begin_inset Index idx
10265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10266 Nesting ! Separation
10272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10274 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10281 \begin_layout Standard
10282 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10284 For example you need two different enumerations:
10287 \begin_layout Enumerate
10292 \begin_layout Enumerate
10297 \begin_layout Enumerate
10301 \begin_layout Standard
10302 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10308 \begin_layout Itemize
10314 \begin_layout Standard
10315 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10321 \begin_layout Enumerate
10325 \begin_layout Enumerate
10329 \begin_layout Enumerate
10333 \begin_layout Standard
10334 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10335 list item and use the menu
10337 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10338 Start New Environment
10341 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10343 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10346 arg "paragraph-break"
10350 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10351 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10352 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10353 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10356 \begin_layout Standard
10357 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10360 arg "paragraph-break"
10363 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10366 \begin_layout Section
10367 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10368 \begin_inset Index idx
10371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10380 \begin_layout Standard
10381 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10382 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10384 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10385 be broken at the end of a line.
10386 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10390 \begin_layout Subsection
10392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10394 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10399 \begin_inset Index idx
10402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10411 \begin_layout Standard
10412 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10413 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10414 ) not to break the line at
10416 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10419 \begin_layout Quote
10420 Further documentation is given in section
10421 \begin_inset Newline newline
10425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10427 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10435 \begin_layout Standard
10436 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10451 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10460 A protected space is set with
10462 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10463 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10465 \begin_inset space ~
10473 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10479 \begin_layout Subsection
10481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10483 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10488 \begin_inset Index idx
10491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10492 Spacing ! Horizontal
10500 \begin_layout Standard
10501 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10504 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10508 The length units are listed in Appendix
10509 \begin_inset space ~
10513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10515 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10526 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10531 \begin_inset Index idx
10534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10535 Spaces ! Inter-word
10543 \begin_layout Standard
10544 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10545 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10546 at the ends of sentences.
10547 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10548 automatically takes care about this.
10549 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10550 followed by a period; see section
10551 \begin_inset space ~
10555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10557 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10562 To insert a normal space, select
10564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10565 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10567 \begin_inset space ~
10575 arg "space-insert normal"
10581 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10585 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10590 \begin_inset Index idx
10593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10602 \begin_layout Standard
10604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10611 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10620 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10621 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10622 inside abbreviations:
10625 \begin_layout Quote
10627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10631 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10634 \begin_layout Standard
10635 or between values and units.
10636 Compare for example this:
10637 \begin_inset Newline newline
10641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10645 \begin_inset Newline newline
10648 10 kg (normal space
10651 \begin_layout Standard
10652 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10654 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10655 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10657 \begin_inset space ~
10665 arg "space-insert thin"
10671 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10675 \begin_layout Standard
10676 You can also insert the following space types:
10679 \begin_layout Description
10681 \begin_inset space ~
10685 \begin_inset space ~
10688 space A line with a
10689 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10693 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10697 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10700 negative thin space between the arrows.
10703 \begin_layout Description
10705 \begin_inset space ~
10709 \begin_inset space ~
10712 space A line with a
10713 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10717 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10721 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10724 negative medium space between the arrows.
10727 \begin_layout Description
10729 \begin_inset space ~
10733 \begin_inset space ~
10736 space A line with a
10737 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10741 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10745 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10748 negative thick space between the arrows.
10751 \begin_layout Description
10753 \begin_inset space ~
10757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10761 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10765 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10769 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10773 \begin_inset space ~
10777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10780 em) space between the arrows.
10783 \begin_layout Description
10785 \begin_inset space ~
10789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10793 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10797 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10801 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10805 \begin_inset space ~
10809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10812 em) space between the arrows.
10815 \begin_layout Description
10817 \begin_inset space ~
10821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10825 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10829 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10833 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10837 \begin_inset space ~
10841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10844 em) space between the arrows.
10847 \begin_layout Description
10849 \begin_inset space ~
10853 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10857 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10862 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10869 cm space between the arrows.
10872 \begin_layout Standard
10874 \begin_inset space ~
10878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10880 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10884 lists the different space sizes.
10887 \begin_layout Standard
10888 \begin_inset Float table
10893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10894 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10899 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10903 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10913 \begin_inset Tabular
10914 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10915 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10916 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10917 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11033 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11190 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11192 \begin_inset Index idx
11195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 \begin_layout Standard
11205 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11206 feature for adding extra space
11207 in a uniform fashion.
11208 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11209 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11210 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11211 equally between themselves.
11214 \begin_layout Standard
11215 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11218 \begin_layout Quote
11220 This is on the left side
11221 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11224 This is on the right
11227 \begin_layout Quote
11230 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11234 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11240 \begin_layout Quote
11243 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11247 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11251 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11257 \begin_layout Standard
11258 That was an example in the
11264 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11268 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11272 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11275 is one in a standard paragraph.
11276 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11280 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11283 \begin_layout Standard
11284 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11287 \begin_inset space ~
11292 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11295 \begin_layout Standard
11297 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11301 \begin_inset space ~
11307 \begin_layout Standard
11309 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11313 \begin_inset space ~
11319 \begin_layout Standard
11321 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11325 \begin_inset space ~
11331 \begin_layout Standard
11333 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11337 \begin_inset space ~
11343 \begin_layout Standard
11345 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11349 \begin_inset space ~
11355 \begin_layout Standard
11357 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11361 \begin_inset space ~
11367 \begin_layout Standard
11368 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11376 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11380 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11382 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11383 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11387 option in the space dialog.
11395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11399 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11404 \begin_inset Index idx
11407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11416 \begin_layout Standard
11417 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11418 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11421 \begin_layout Standard
11422 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11425 What is correct English?:
11426 \begin_inset Newline newline
11430 \begin_inset Newline newline
11434 \begin_inset space ~
11437 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11438 \begin_inset Newline newline
11442 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11453 \begin_inset Newline newline
11457 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11468 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11474 \begin_layout Standard
11476 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11481 \begin_inset space ~
11485 \begin_inset space ~
11489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11493 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11495 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11496 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11500 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11506 \begin_inset space ~
11510 \begin_inset space ~
11514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11517 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11526 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11527 That is why it is named
11528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11536 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11537 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11541 \begin_layout Subsection
11543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11545 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11550 \begin_inset Index idx
11553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11562 \begin_layout Standard
11563 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11565 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11566 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11568 \begin_inset space ~
11574 There you find the following sizes:
11577 \begin_layout Standard
11590 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11591 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11596 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11598 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11599 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11601 \begin_inset space ~
11607 \begin_inset Index idx
11610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11611 Document ! Settings
11616 for the paragraph separation.
11617 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11628 \begin_layout Standard
11634 \begin_inset Index idx
11637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11643 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11644 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11649 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11650 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11659 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11668 s are described in section
11669 \begin_inset space ~
11673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11675 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11684 If there are several
11688 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11689 You can therefore use
11693 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11696 \begin_layout Standard
11701 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11702 \begin_inset space ~
11706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11708 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11715 \begin_layout Standard
11716 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11726 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11727 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11739 \begin_layout Subsection
11740 Paragraph Alignment
11741 \begin_inset Index idx
11744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11745 Paragraph ! Alignment
11753 \begin_layout Standard
11754 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11756 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11759 dialog (toolbar button
11762 arg "layout-paragraph"
11766 There are five possibilities:
11769 \begin_layout Itemize
11777 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11783 \begin_layout Itemize
11791 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11797 \begin_layout Itemize
11805 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11811 \begin_layout Itemize
11819 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11825 \begin_layout Itemize
11833 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11839 \begin_layout Standard
11840 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11841 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11842 the left and right margins.
11843 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11846 \begin_layout Standard
11848 This paragraph is right aligned,
11851 \begin_layout Standard
11853 this one is centered,
11856 \begin_layout Standard
11858 this one is left aligned.
11861 \begin_layout Subsection
11863 \begin_inset Index idx
11866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11867 Page breaks ! Forced
11873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11875 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11882 \begin_layout Standard
11883 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11884 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11885 force a page break where you want one.
11886 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11887 is good at page breaking.
11888 Only if you use a lot of
11892 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11893 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11896 \begin_layout Standard
11897 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11898 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11902 have to change the page breaking.
11905 \begin_layout Standard
11906 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11908 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11911 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11913 \begin_inset space ~
11919 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11921 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11922 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11924 \begin_inset space ~
11929 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11931 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11932 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11935 \begin_layout Standard
11936 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11937 at the top of a page.
11938 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11940 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11941 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11942 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11946 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11950 to learn more about
11957 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11961 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11966 \begin_inset Index idx
11969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11970 Page breaks ! Clear
11978 \begin_layout Standard
11979 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11980 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11981 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11982 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11983 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11986 \begin_layout Standard
11987 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11990 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11992 \begin_inset space ~
11998 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12001 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12003 \begin_inset space ~
12007 \begin_inset space ~
12012 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12013 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12016 \begin_layout Subsection
12018 \begin_inset Index idx
12021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12030 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12037 \begin_layout Standard
12038 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12040 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12042 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12043 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12045 \begin_inset space ~
12049 \begin_inset space ~
12057 arg "newline-insert newline"
12061 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12063 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12064 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12066 \begin_inset space ~
12070 \begin_inset space ~
12078 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12081 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12083 This is useful to avoid
12084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12091 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12094 \begin_layout Standard
12095 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12096 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12098 very good at line breaking.
12099 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12100 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12101 \begin_inset space ~
12105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12107 reference "sec:Quote"
12112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12114 reference "sec:Verse"
12119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12121 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12128 \begin_layout Subsection
12130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12132 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12137 \begin_inset Index idx
12140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12149 \begin_layout Standard
12151 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12162 \begin_layout Standard
12166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12167 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12169 \begin_inset space ~
12174 you can insert horizontal lines.
12175 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12176 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12177 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12180 \begin_layout Standard
12182 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12193 \begin_layout Section
12194 Characters and Symbols
12197 \begin_layout Standard
12198 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12199 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12200 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12208 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12212 for information on how this is done.
12215 \begin_layout Standard
12216 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12221 dialog via the menu
12223 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12224 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12230 \begin_layout Standard
12231 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12239 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12240 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12242 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12250 \begin_layout Section
12251 Fonts and Text Styles
12252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12254 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12261 \begin_layout Subsection
12263 \begin_inset Index idx
12266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12275 \begin_layout Standard
12276 There are two types of fonts:
12279 \begin_layout Description
12281 \begin_inset space ~
12285 \begin_inset Index idx
12288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12294 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12299 characters) in the font.
12300 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12301 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12302 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12303 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12304 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12305 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12306 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12307 \begin_inset Newline newline
12310 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12311 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12312 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12313 sizes than at small ones.
12314 \begin_inset Newline newline
12328 \begin_inset space ~
12336 \begin_layout Description
12338 \begin_inset space ~
12342 \begin_inset Index idx
12345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12351 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12352 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12353 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12354 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12355 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12356 image manipulation program.
12357 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12358 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12359 \begin_inset space ~
12362 pixels high up to 34
12363 \begin_inset space ~
12366 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12367 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12368 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12370 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12371 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12372 \begin_inset Newline newline
12375 Bitmap fonts are named
12378 \begin_inset space ~
12383 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12386 \begin_layout Standard
12387 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12388 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12389 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12390 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12391 use scalable fonts.
12394 \begin_layout Standard
12395 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12398 \begin_layout Standard
12399 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12400 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12401 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12402 font to emphasize text, you use an
12403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12411 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12413 In \SpecialChar LyX
12414 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12418 \begin_layout Subsection
12421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12423 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12430 \begin_layout Standard
12431 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12432 used its own fonts.
12433 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12434 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12437 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12438 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12439 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12440 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12441 to a word processor.
12442 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12443 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12444 files are very portable across
12445 different machines.
12446 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12447 has increased a lot
12448 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12451 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12453 \begin_inset space ~
12457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12459 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12464 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12465 code in the document
12466 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12469 \begin_layout Standard
12470 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12471 engines that are also able directly
12472 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12474 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12476 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12478 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12479 that is installed on your system.
12480 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12483 \begin_layout Standard
12484 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12492 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12493 es; so you might have to experiment.
12501 \begin_layout Subsection
12502 Document Font and Font size
12503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12505 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12510 \begin_inset Index idx
12513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12520 \begin_inset Index idx
12523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12532 \begin_layout Standard
12533 You can set the document fonts in the
12535 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12539 \begin_inset Index idx
12542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12543 Document ! Settings
12553 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12554 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12557 \begin_inset space ~
12566 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12568 \begin_inset space ~
12571 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12574 \begin_layout Standard
12579 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12580 This requires that you use
12592 as the output format, i.
12593 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12597 \begin_inset space \space{}
12600 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12601 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12602 installed (see section
12603 \begin_inset space ~
12607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12609 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12614 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12616 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12617 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12619 \begin_inset space ~
12622 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12623 cannot determine the family.
12624 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12625 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12628 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12631 \begin_layout Standard
12632 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12633 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12638 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12644 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12645 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12653 \begin_inset space ~
12659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12672 European Computer Modern
12675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12682 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12685 \begin_layout Standard
12694 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12695 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12700 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12703 \begin_inset space ~
12708 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12714 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12715 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12718 \begin_layout Itemize
12722 \begin_inset space ~
12727 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12740 \begin_inset space ~
12745 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12746 community in order to replace
12750 as the default font.
12751 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12752 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12755 \begin_inset space ~
12768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12769 One difference is improved kerning.
12777 \begin_layout Itemize
12781 \begin_inset space ~
12785 \begin_inset space ~
12790 fonts in (the rare) case that
12793 \begin_inset space ~
12798 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12813 Virtual means that it
12814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12825 -glyphs from other fonts.
12826 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12848 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12854 \begin_inset Index idx
12857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12859 -packages ! aeguill
12864 with the document preamble line
12865 \begin_inset Newline newline
12872 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12873 \begin_inset Newline newline
12878 will fix the guillemet problem.
12883 and that accented characters are not
12887 glyph, but built of
12891 characters, the accent and the letter.
12892 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12898 If you search for example for the French word
12899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12906 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12915 and not for the glyph
12916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12920 \begin_inset space ~
12924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12930 \begin_layout Itemize
12931 If you do not like the look of
12939 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12944 \begin_inset space ~
12950 \begin_inset space ~
12960 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12961 \begin_inset space ~
12964 serif and typewriter fonts,
12968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12969 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12976 \begin_inset space ~
12985 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12990 \begin_inset space \space{}
12998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13002 \begin_inset space \space{}
13008 \begin_inset space ~
13016 \begin_inset space ~
13026 but you can also select your own.
13027 \begin_inset Newline newline
13030 The differences between roman,
13033 \begin_inset space ~
13042 fonts are explained in section
13043 \begin_inset space ~
13047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13049 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13054 \begin_inset Newline newline
13060 \begin_inset space ~
13065 was originally designed for newspapers.
13066 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13067 into the small newspaper columns.
13071 \begin_inset space ~
13076 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13079 \begin_layout Standard
13080 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13093 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13098 depends on the class you are using.
13099 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13102 \begin_layout Standard
13103 Note that the font size is the
13108 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13109 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13110 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13111 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13114 \begin_inset space ~
13120 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13121 \begin_inset space ~
13125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13127 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13134 \begin_layout Standard
13138 \begin_inset space ~
13143 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13145 \begin_inset space ~
13148 serif or typewriter.
13153 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13163 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13166 \begin_layout Standard
13171 LaTeX font encoding
13173 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13174 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13180 \begin_inset Index idx
13183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13185 -packages ! fontenc
13191 \begin_inset space ~
13195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13197 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13202 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13203 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13210 \begin_layout Standard
13211 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13213 Use Old Style Figures
13217 Use True Small Caps
13220 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13223 Use Old Style Figures
13225 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13227 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13235 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13239 Use True Small Caps
13241 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13242 of scaled capitals.
13243 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13244 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13247 \begin_layout Standard
13252 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13253 a font to display the script characters.
13257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13258 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13264 \begin_inset Index idx
13267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13274 So this has no effect for the document language
13288 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13292 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13300 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13305 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13306 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13308 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13310 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13313 dialog, see section
13314 \begin_inset space ~
13318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13320 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13332 \begin_layout Subsection
13336 \begin_layout Standard
13337 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13338 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13340 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13341 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13342 choose a math font in the dialog
13344 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13348 \begin_inset Index idx
13351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13352 Document ! Settings
13358 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13359 automatically selects a math font.
13360 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13361 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13370 \begin_inset space ~
13376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13381 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13382 document font is available.
13385 \begin_layout Standard
13386 Note that the math font will not be used for
13390 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13396 or by the insertion of the command
13403 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13404 \begin_inset space ~
13408 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13409 while the math characters do not.
13411 \begin_inset space ~
13414 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13417 \begin_inset space ~
13425 \begin_inset space ~
13430 in the document font settings.
13433 \begin_layout Standard
13434 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13435 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13436 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13437 font (in most cases
13438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13444 \begin_inset space ~
13450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13453 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13454 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13462 \begin_inset space ~
13468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13474 \begin_layout Subsection
13475 Using Different Character Styles
13476 \begin_inset Index idx
13479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13486 \begin_inset Index idx
13489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13498 \begin_layout Standard
13499 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13500 automatically changes the character style for certain
13501 paragraph environments.
13503 supports two character styles,
13512 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13516 \begin_layout Standard
13521 style, do one of the following:
13524 \begin_layout Itemize
13525 click on the toolbar button
13534 \begin_layout Itemize
13535 use the key binding
13544 \begin_layout Standard
13545 These commands are all toggles.
13550 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13553 \begin_layout Standard
13554 One typically uses the
13558 style for proper names.
13560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13567 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13575 \begin_layout Standard
13576 A more widely used character style is the
13581 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13588 \begin_layout Itemize
13589 clicking on the toolbar button
13598 \begin_layout Itemize
13599 using the keybindings
13608 \begin_layout Standard
13613 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13615 use a different font.
13618 \begin_layout Standard
13619 We've been using the
13623 style all over the place in this document.
13624 Here's one more example:
13627 \begin_layout Quotation
13630 Do not overuse character styles!
13633 \begin_layout Standard
13634 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13635 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13636 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13637 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13641 \begin_layout Standard
13642 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13650 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13652 \begin_inset space ~
13655 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13661 arg "dialog-show character"
13667 \begin_layout Subsection
13668 Fine-Tuning with the
13673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13675 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13680 \begin_inset Index idx
13683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13692 \begin_layout Standard
13693 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13695 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13696 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13697 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13698 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13699 from ordinary dialog.
13702 \begin_layout Standard
13703 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13704 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13705 \begin_inset Newline newline
13708 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13709 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13712 \begin_layout Standard
13713 To use custom character styles, open the
13715 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13717 \begin_inset space ~
13720 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13723 dialog or press the toolbar button
13726 arg "dialog-show character"
13730 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13731 font property that you can choose.
13732 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13735 \begin_inset space ~
13740 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13745 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13746 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13747 environments all at once.
13750 \begin_layout Standard
13751 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13754 \begin_inset space ~
13766 \begin_layout Labeling
13767 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13781 The possible options are:
13785 \begin_layout Labeling
13786 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13791 This is the Roman font family.
13792 Normally a serif font.
13793 It's also the default family.
13803 \begin_layout Labeling
13804 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13808 \begin_inset space ~
13815 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13827 \begin_layout Labeling
13828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13835 This is the Typewriter font family.
13841 arg "font-typewriter"
13850 \begin_layout Labeling
13851 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13856 This corresponds to the print weight.
13861 \begin_layout Labeling
13862 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13867 This is the Medium font series.
13868 It's also the default series.
13871 \begin_layout Labeling
13872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13879 This is the Bold font series.
13892 \begin_layout Labeling
13893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13898 As the name implies.
13903 \begin_layout Labeling
13904 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13909 This is the Upright font shape.
13910 It's also the default shape.
13913 \begin_layout Labeling
13914 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13928 s the Italic font shape
13934 \begin_layout Labeling
13935 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13942 This is the Slanted font shape
13944 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13945 , this is different from italic).
13948 \begin_layout Labeling
13949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13953 \begin_inset space ~
13960 This is the Small caps font shape
13967 \begin_layout Labeling
13968 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13973 Alters the text color.
13974 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13978 \begin_inset space ~
13983 , which means that the document default color set in
13985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13986 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
13992 \begin_inset space ~
13997 is used, you can choose between
14074 \begin_inset Index idx
14077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14086 \begin_layout Labeling
14087 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14092 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14093 the language of the document.
14094 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14095 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14097 \begin_inset Newline newline
14100 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14102 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14103 When using the spell checking (see section
14104 \begin_inset space ~
14108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14110 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14114 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14117 \begin_layout Labeling
14118 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14123 Alters the size of the font.
14124 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14125 proportional to the document font size.
14126 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14127 the details, but a general description of what
14133 \begin_layout Labeling
14134 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14155 arg "font-size tiny"
14161 \begin_layout Labeling
14162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14183 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14189 \begin_layout Labeling
14190 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14211 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14217 \begin_layout Labeling
14218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14239 arg "font-size small"
14245 \begin_layout Labeling
14246 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14260 It's also the default size.
14264 arg "font-size normal"
14270 \begin_layout Labeling
14271 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14292 arg "font-size large"
14298 \begin_layout Labeling
14299 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14320 arg "font-size larger"
14326 \begin_layout Labeling
14327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14348 arg "font-size largest"
14354 \begin_layout Labeling
14355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14376 arg "font-size huge"
14382 \begin_layout Labeling
14383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14404 arg "font-size giant"
14410 \begin_layout Labeling
14411 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14416 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14436 arg "font-size increase"
14442 \begin_layout Labeling
14443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14448 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14468 arg "font-size decrease"
14475 \begin_layout Standard
14480 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14481 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14483 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14484 — use those instead.
14485 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14488 \begin_layout Labeling
14489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14494 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14499 \begin_layout Labeling
14500 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14507 This is text with emphasize on
14510 This might seem like the same as
14514 , but it is actually a bit different.
14520 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14522 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14525 \begin_layout Labeling
14526 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14533 This is text with Underbar on.
14539 arg "font-underline"
14545 \begin_inset Newline newline
14550 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14551 when you could not change fonts.
14552 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14553 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14554 because some people
14558 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14561 \begin_layout Labeling
14562 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14566 \begin_inset space ~
14573 This is text with Double underbar on.
14579 arg "font-underunderline"
14583 \begin_inset Newline newline
14586 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14587 about double underbar.
14590 \begin_layout Labeling
14591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14595 \begin_inset space ~
14602 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14608 arg "font-underwave"
14612 \begin_inset Newline newline
14615 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14616 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14619 \begin_layout Labeling
14620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14627 This is text with Strikeout on.
14633 arg "font-strikeout"
14637 \begin_inset Newline newline
14640 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14641 changed in the meantime.
14644 \begin_layout Labeling
14645 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14652 This is text with Noun on.
14659 , this is a logical attribute.
14660 Normally it's equivalent to
14663 \begin_inset space ~
14672 \begin_layout Standard
14673 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14674 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14676 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14678 \begin_inset space ~
14681 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14687 arg "dialog-show character"
14690 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14691 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14694 arg "textstyle-apply"
14698 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14702 \begin_layout Standard
14703 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14710 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14711 (suppose you just set the shape to
14712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14730 \begin_inset space ~
14742 \begin_layout Standard
14743 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14751 \begin_inset space ~
14763 \begin_layout Itemize
14769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14776 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14794 \begin_inset Newline newline
14798 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14812 \begin_inset Note Note
14815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14816 For more on phantoms see section
14817 \begin_inset space ~
14821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14823 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14833 \begin_inset Newline newline
14839 \begin_layout Itemize
14844 fonts use characters with serifs.
14845 These are the small
14846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14853 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14854 The following example shows the difference:
14855 \begin_inset Newline newline
14859 \begin_inset Newline newline
14864 text without serifs
14867 \begin_inset Newline newline
14870 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14871 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14878 \begin_layout Itemize
14883 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14884 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14885 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14888 \begin_layout Standard
14889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14896 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14897 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14900 \begin_inset space ~
14905 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14906 the property to be removed.
14907 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14908 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14909 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14927 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14928 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14936 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14940 \begin_inset space ~
14945 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14956 If you, for example, set
14957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14975 \begin_inset space ~
14980 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14989 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14992 \begin_layout Standard
14993 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14994 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14997 \begin_layout Section
14998 Printing and Previewing
15001 \begin_layout Subsection
15005 \begin_layout Standard
15006 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15007 using \SpecialChar LyX
15008 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15009 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15010 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15011 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15013 Additional Features
15018 \begin_layout Standard
15020 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15023 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15024 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15025 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15028 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15029 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15030 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15031 to turn your writing into printable output.
15032 This happens in two stages:
15035 \begin_layout Enumerate
15036 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15037 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15039 a file with the extension,
15040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15054 \begin_layout Enumerate
15055 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15056 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15057 to use the commands in the
15061 file to produce printable output.
15064 \begin_layout Subsection
15065 Output file formats
15066 \begin_inset Index idx
15069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15078 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15085 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15086 Simple text (ASCII)
15087 \begin_inset Index idx
15090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15091 File formats ! ASCII
15099 \begin_layout Standard
15100 This file type has the extension
15101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15113 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15117 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15124 \begin_layout Standard
15125 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15127 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15128 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15130 \begin_inset space ~
15136 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15137 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15138 bibliography (section
15139 \begin_inset space ~
15143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15145 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15150 If your document includes such material, use
15152 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15153 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15155 \begin_inset space ~
15159 \begin_inset space ~
15163 \begin_inset space ~
15171 \begin_inset space ~
15175 \begin_inset space ~
15181 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15182 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15188 \begin_inset Index idx
15191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15192 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15201 \begin_layout Standard
15202 This file type has the extension
15203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15214 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15217 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15218 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15219 -Errors or to process it manually
15220 with console commands.
15221 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15222 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15223 's temporary directory whenever you
15224 view or export your document.
15227 \begin_layout Standard
15228 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15229 -file using the menu
15231 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15232 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15236 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15237 export variants are explained in section
15238 \begin_inset space ~
15242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15244 reference "subsec:Export"
15251 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15253 \begin_inset Index idx
15256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15265 \begin_layout Standard
15266 This file type has the extension
15267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15287 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15288 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15289 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15293 \begin_layout Standard
15294 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15295 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15296 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15297 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15298 when you view the DVI.
15299 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15302 \begin_layout Standard
15303 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15305 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15306 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15311 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15312 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15314 \begin_inset space ~
15320 The latter option uses the program
15322 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15328 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15331 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15332 font access (see section
15333 \begin_inset space ~
15337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15339 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15344 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15345 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15350 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15352 \begin_inset Index idx
15355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15356 File formats ! PostScript
15364 \begin_layout Standard
15365 This file type has the extension
15366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15378 PostScript was developed by the company
15382 as a printer language.
15383 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15385 PostScript can be seen as a
15386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15389 programming language
15390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15393 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15398 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15405 \begin_inset Index idx
15408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15410 -packages ! pstricks
15420 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15423 \begin_layout Standard
15424 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15428 Encapsulated PostScript
15429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15432 (EPS, file extension
15433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15445 As \SpecialChar LyX
15446 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15447 convert them in the background to EPS.
15448 If, for example, you have 50
15449 \begin_inset space ~
15452 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15454 \begin_inset space ~
15457 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15458 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15460 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15461 EPS to avoid this problem.
15464 \begin_layout Standard
15465 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15467 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15468 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15474 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15476 \begin_inset Index idx
15479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15486 \begin_inset Index idx
15489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15498 \begin_layout Standard
15499 This file type has the extension
15500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15516 Portable Document Format
15517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15524 was derived from PostScript.
15525 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15534 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15535 looks exactly the same.
15538 \begin_layout Standard
15539 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15543 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15547 (JPG, file extension
15548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15575 Portable Network Graphics
15576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15579 (PNG, file extension
15580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15592 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15593 converts them in the
15594 background to one of these formats.
15595 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15596 will slow down your workflow.
15597 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15600 \begin_layout Standard
15601 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15603 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15609 \begin_layout Description
15611 \begin_inset space ~
15614 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15618 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15621 \begin_layout Description
15623 \begin_inset space ~
15630 ) This uses the program
15632 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15635 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15638 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15641 is a new engine, derived from
15645 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15646 access (see section
15647 \begin_inset space ~
15651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15653 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15658 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15659 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15664 \begin_layout Description
15666 \begin_inset space ~
15673 ) This uses the program
15678 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15684 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15685 font access (see section
15686 \begin_inset space ~
15690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15692 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15697 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15698 vertically written Japanese.
15701 \begin_layout Description
15703 \begin_inset space ~
15706 (cropped) This is the same as
15709 \begin_inset space ~
15714 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15715 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15716 to generate good-looking
15717 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15720 \begin_layout Description
15722 \begin_inset space ~
15725 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15729 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15733 \begin_layout Description
15735 \begin_inset space ~
15738 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15742 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15743 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15747 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15748 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15751 \begin_layout Standard
15755 \begin_inset space ~
15764 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15765 works without problems.
15766 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15767 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15771 \begin_inset space ~
15779 \begin_inset space ~
15784 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15792 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15794 \begin_inset Index idx
15797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15798 FileFormats ! XHTML
15804 \begin_inset Index idx
15807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15816 \begin_layout Standard
15817 This file type has the extension
15818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15830 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15831 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15832 When \SpecialChar LyX
15833 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15834 suitable for the purpose.
15835 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15838 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15841 between different formats, which are described in section
15843 Math Output in XHTML
15848 \begin_inset space ~
15856 \begin_layout Standard
15857 XHTML output remains
15858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15865 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15866 features are supported yet.
15870 and the World Wide Web
15874 Additional Features
15876 manual, for more information.
15879 \begin_layout Standard
15880 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15882 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15883 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15889 \begin_layout Subsection
15891 \begin_inset Index idx
15894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15903 \begin_layout Standard
15904 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15905 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15914 or use the toolbar button
15921 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15922 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15929 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15933 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15941 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15946 Further output formats can be selected via
15948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15949 View (Other Formats)
15951 or the toolbar button
15960 \begin_layout Standard
15961 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15962 viewer window using the menu
15964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15969 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15970 Update (Other Formats)
15975 \begin_layout Standard
15976 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
15979 To have a real output, export your document.
15982 \begin_layout Section
15983 A few Words about Typography
15984 \begin_inset Index idx
15987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15996 \begin_layout Subsection
15997 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15998 \begin_inset Index idx
16001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16008 \begin_inset Index idx
16011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16020 \begin_layout Standard
16021 In \SpecialChar LyX
16023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16034 character comes in four lengths: the
16046 , and the minus sign:
16047 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16053 \begin_layout Standard
16054 \begin_inset Tabular
16055 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16056 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16057 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16058 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16059 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16060 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16089 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16129 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16154 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16156 \begin_inset space ~
16159 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16166 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16193 \begin_inset space ~
16196 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16217 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16251 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16257 \begin_layout Standard
16258 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16270 character multiple times in a row.
16271 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16272 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16305 \begin_layout Standard
16306 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16307 math mode and has a length of its own.
16308 Here are some examples:
16311 \begin_layout Enumerate
16312 line- and page-breaks
16313 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16323 \begin_layout Enumerate
16325 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16335 \begin_layout Enumerate
16336 Oh — there's a dash.
16337 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16347 \begin_layout Enumerate
16348 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16352 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16362 \begin_layout Subsection
16364 \begin_inset Index idx
16367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16376 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16383 \begin_layout Standard
16384 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16385 but automatically in the output.
16386 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16392 \begin_inset Index idx
16395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16402 following the rules of the document language.
16405 \begin_layout Standard
16407 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16411 font and with unusual constructs, like
16412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16420 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16421 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16422 This is done with the menu
16424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16425 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16427 \begin_inset space ~
16433 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16435 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16439 \begin_layout Standard
16440 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16441 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16452 would then see the hyphen
16453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16460 as a hyphenation possibility.
16461 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16462 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16463 as described in section
16465 Prevent Hyphenation
16470 \begin_inset space ~
16478 \begin_layout Subsection
16480 \begin_inset Index idx
16483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16493 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16496 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16503 \begin_layout Standard
16504 When \SpecialChar LyX
16505 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16506 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16508 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16514 appropriate amount of space.
16515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16518 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16520 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16521 gets after another word.
16524 \begin_layout Standard
16525 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16526 not work in all cases.
16528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16539 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16540 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16543 \begin_layout Standard
16544 Here are some examples of
16548 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16551 \begin_layout Itemize
16556 \begin_layout Itemize
16561 \begin_layout Standard
16562 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16565 \begin_layout Itemize
16567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16571 this is too much space!
16574 \begin_layout Itemize
16579 \begin_layout Standard
16580 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16583 \begin_layout Standard
16584 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16587 \begin_layout Enumerate
16591 \begin_inset space ~
16596 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16597 \begin_inset space ~
16601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16603 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16608 \begin_inset Index idx
16611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16612 Spaces ! inter-word
16620 \begin_layout Enumerate
16624 \begin_inset space ~
16629 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16630 \begin_inset space ~
16634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16636 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16641 \begin_inset Index idx
16644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16653 \begin_layout Enumerate
16657 \begin_inset space ~
16661 \begin_inset space ~
16665 \begin_inset space ~
16672 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16674 \begin_inset space ~
16679 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16680 This function is also bound to
16683 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16689 \begin_layout Standard
16690 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16693 \begin_layout Itemize
16695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16699 \begin_inset space \space{}
16702 this is too much space!
16705 \begin_layout Itemize
16706 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16710 \begin_layout Standard
16711 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16712 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16714 will take care of this.
16717 \begin_layout Standard
16718 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16722 \begin_inset space ~
16728 feature described in the section
16730 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16735 Additional Features
16740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16742 \begin_inset Index idx
16745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16746 Typography ! Quotes
16752 \begin_inset Index idx
16755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16786 \begin_layout Standard
16788 usually sets quotes correctly.
16789 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16790 and use a closing quote at the end.
16792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16800 The keyboard character,
16804 , generates this automatically.
16807 \begin_layout Standard
16808 You can specify what character the
16812 key produces using the submenu
16818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16822 \begin_inset Index idx
16825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16826 Document ! Settings
16836 There are six choices:
16839 \begin_layout Labeling
16840 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16863 \begin_layout Labeling
16864 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16867 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16871 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16877 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16881 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16887 \begin_layout Labeling
16888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16891 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16895 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16901 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16905 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16911 \begin_layout Labeling
16912 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16915 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16919 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16925 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16929 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16935 \begin_layout Labeling
16936 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16939 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16943 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16949 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16953 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16959 \begin_layout Labeling
16960 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16963 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16967 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16973 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16977 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16983 \begin_layout Standard
16984 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16987 arg "quote-insert single"
16993 \begin_layout Subsection
16995 \begin_inset Index idx
16998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16999 Typography ! Ligatures
17005 \begin_inset Index idx
17008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17039 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17046 \begin_layout Standard
17047 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17048 print them as single characters.
17049 These groups are known as
17054 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17055 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17057 Here are the standard ligatures:
17060 \begin_layout Itemize
17064 \begin_layout Itemize
17068 \begin_layout Itemize
17072 \begin_layout Itemize
17076 \begin_layout Itemize
17080 \begin_layout Standard
17081 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17084 \begin_layout Standard
17085 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17086 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17094 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17110 To break a ligature, use
17112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17113 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17115 \begin_inset space ~
17122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17133 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17150 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17158 \begin_layout Subsection
17160 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17162 \begin_inset Index idx
17165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17175 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17182 \begin_layout Standard
17185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17186 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17190 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17193 \begin_layout Description
17195 The name of the game.
17198 \begin_layout Description
17200 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17204 \begin_layout Description
17206 The \SpecialChar TeX
17207 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17211 \begin_layout Description
17212 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17213 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17217 \begin_layout Standard
17218 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17224 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17232 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17233 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17234 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17235 converges to the number
17236 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17239 : The actual version is
17240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17248 , the previous one was
17249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17260 \begin_layout Subsection
17262 \begin_inset Index idx
17265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17274 \begin_layout Standard
17275 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17276 space between two words.
17277 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17287 for units use the menu
17289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17290 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17292 \begin_inset space ~
17300 arg "space-insert thin"
17306 \begin_layout Standard
17307 Here is an example to show the differences:
17310 \begin_layout Standard
17311 \begin_inset Tabular
17312 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17313 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17314 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17315 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17322 \begin_inset space ~
17326 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17338 space between number and unit
17345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17354 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17366 half space between number and unit
17379 \begin_layout Subsection
17381 \begin_inset Index idx
17384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17385 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17393 \begin_layout Standard
17394 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17396 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17397 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17398 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17399 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17400 These bits of text became known as
17411 \begin_layout Standard
17412 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17413 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17414 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17415 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17416 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17417 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17418 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17419 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17420 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17421 \begin_inset Newline newline
17429 \begin_inset Newline newline
17437 \begin_inset Newline newline
17440 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17441 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17442 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17444 \begin_inset space ~
17448 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17450 key "latexcompanion"
17455 \begin_inset space ~
17459 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17465 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17466 's page break mechanism.
17469 \begin_layout Chapter
17470 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17473 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17480 \begin_layout Standard
17481 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17484 \begin_inset space ~
17490 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17493 \begin_layout Section
17495 \begin_inset Index idx
17498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17514 \begin_layout Standard
17516 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17519 \begin_layout Description
17522 \begin_inset space ~
17525 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17526 \begin_inset Newline newline
17530 \begin_inset Note Note
17533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17534 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17542 \begin_layout Description
17543 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17544 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17545 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17548 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17549 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17551 \begin_inset space ~
17557 \begin_inset Newline newline
17561 \begin_inset Note Comment
17564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17565 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17574 \begin_layout Description
17576 \begin_inset space ~
17579 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17580 set in the document settings under
17582 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17584 \begin_inset space ~
17590 \begin_inset Newline newline
17594 \begin_inset Newline newline
17598 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17607 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17608 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17613 of a comment that appears in the output.
17619 \begin_inset Newline newline
17623 \begin_inset Newline newline
17626 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17629 \begin_layout Standard
17630 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17638 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17642 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17645 \begin_layout Section
17647 \begin_inset Index idx
17650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17659 name "sec:Footnotes"
17666 \begin_layout Standard
17668 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17671 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17674 or the toolbar button
17677 arg "footnote-insert"
17689 \begin_inset Graphics
17690 filename clipart/footnote.png
17699 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17700 's representation of your footnote.
17710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17729 label, the box will
17733 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17734 Clicking on the box label again will close
17747 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17748 and click on the footnote
17763 \begin_layout Standard
17764 Here is an example footnote:
17772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17773 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17781 \begin_layout Standard
17782 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17783 position where the footnote box is placed.
17784 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17785 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17786 according to the document class.
17788 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17789 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17795 ey are described in the
17798 \begin_inset space ~
17806 \begin_layout Section
17808 \begin_inset Index idx
17811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17820 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17827 \begin_layout Standard
17828 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17830 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17834 \begin_inset space ~
17839 or the toolbar button
17842 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17868 appearing within your text.
17869 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17870 's representation of your margin
17879 \begin_layout Standard
17880 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17884 \begin_inset Marginal
17887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17889 This is a marginal note.
17897 \begin_layout Standard
17898 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17899 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17900 pages, right on odd pages.
17903 \begin_layout Standard
17904 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17907 \begin_inset space ~
17915 \begin_inset space ~
17923 \begin_layout Section
17924 Graphics and Images
17925 \begin_inset Index idx
17928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17935 \begin_inset Index idx
17938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17947 name "sec:Graphics"
17954 \begin_layout Standard
17955 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17956 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17959 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17968 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17971 \begin_layout Standard
17972 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17977 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17978 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17980 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17981 \begin_inset space ~
17985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17987 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17994 \begin_layout Standard
17999 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18000 of the image in the output.
18001 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18005 \begin_inset space ~
18009 \begin_inset space ~
18018 \begin_inset space ~
18022 \begin_inset space ~
18026 \begin_inset space ~
18031 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18032 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18040 \begin_layout Standard
18044 \begin_inset space ~
18048 \begin_inset space ~
18053 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18054 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18056 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18061 \begin_inset space ~
18066 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18067 with the image size is printed.
18070 \begin_layout Standard
18071 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18072 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18074 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18077 \begin_layout Standard
18079 \begin_inset Graphics
18080 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18088 \begin_layout Standard
18089 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18090 the image into a float, see section
18091 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18097 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18104 \begin_layout Subsection
18106 \begin_inset Index idx
18109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18118 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18125 \begin_layout Standard
18126 You can insert images in any known file format.
18127 But as we explained in section
18128 \begin_inset space ~
18132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18134 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18138 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18140 therefore uses the program
18144 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18145 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18146 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18147 \begin_inset space ~
18151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18153 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18160 \begin_layout Standard
18161 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18164 \begin_layout Description
18166 \begin_inset space ~
18169 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18170 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18171 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18175 Graphics Interchange Format
18176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18179 (GIF, file extension
18180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18192 \begin_inset Index idx
18195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18227 Portable Network Graphics
18228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18231 (PNG, file extension
18232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18244 \begin_inset Index idx
18247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18279 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18283 (JPG, file extension
18284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18308 \begin_inset Index idx
18311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18342 \begin_layout Description
18344 \begin_inset space ~
18347 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18349 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18350 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18351 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18352 \begin_inset Newline newline
18355 Scalable image formats can be
18356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18359 Scalable Vector Graphics
18360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18363 (SVG, file extension
18364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18376 \begin_inset Index idx
18379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18411 Encapsulated PostScript
18412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18415 (EPS, file extension
18416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18428 \begin_inset Index idx
18431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18463 Portable Document Format
18464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18467 (PDF, file extension
18468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18480 \begin_inset Index idx
18483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18498 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18499 result will not be scalable.
18500 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18506 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18514 \begin_layout Standard
18515 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18522 \begin_layout Subsection
18523 Grouping of Image Settings
18524 \begin_inset Index idx
18527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18528 Images ! Settings grouping
18536 \begin_layout Standard
18537 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18539 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18540 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18542 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18543 need to manually change each of them.
18547 \begin_layout Standard
18548 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18551 \begin_inset space ~
18555 \begin_inset space ~
18567 \begin_inset space ~
18571 \begin_inset space ~
18577 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18578 and checking the name of the desired group.
18581 \begin_layout Section
18583 \begin_inset Index idx
18586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18602 \begin_layout Standard
18603 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18606 arg "tabular-insert"
18611 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18615 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18616 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18617 from the rest of the table.
18618 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18619 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18621 Here is an example table:
18624 \begin_layout Standard
18626 \begin_inset Tabular
18627 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18628 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18629 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18630 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18631 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18632 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18832 \begin_layout Subsection
18836 \begin_layout Standard
18837 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18840 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18844 This brings up the table dialog.
18845 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18846 cursor is placed currently.
18847 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18848 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18849 done on all of your selection.
18852 \begin_layout Standard
18853 In addition to the table dialog, the
18856 \begin_inset space ~
18861 helps you in setting table properties.
18862 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18865 \begin_layout Standard
18869 \begin_inset space ~
18874 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18875 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18876 current cell respectively.
18877 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18879 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18880 of text, see section
18881 \begin_inset space ~
18885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18887 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18894 \begin_layout Standard
18895 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18896 using the check box
18905 This will merge the cells to
18909 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18910 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18911 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18912 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18913 in the last row without the upper border:
18916 \begin_layout Standard
18918 \begin_inset Tabular
18919 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18920 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18921 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18922 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18923 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18924 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18935 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18944 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19020 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19055 \begin_layout Standard
19056 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19057 -arguments for the table.
19058 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19059 explained in the chapter
19066 \begin_inset space ~
19072 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19073 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19074 but are visible in the output.
19077 \begin_layout Standard
19078 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19086 Most DVI-viewers are
19090 able to display rotations.
19098 \begin_layout Standard
19103 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19108 adds lines for all cell borders.
19111 \begin_layout Subsection
19113 \begin_inset Index idx
19116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19117 Tables ! Longtables
19123 \begin_inset Index idx
19126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19135 \begin_layout Standard
19136 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19139 \begin_inset space ~
19143 \begin_inset space ~
19152 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19153 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19156 \begin_layout Description
19161 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19162 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19163 except for the first page, if
19166 \begin_inset space ~
19174 \begin_layout Description
19178 \begin_inset space ~
19183 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19184 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19187 \begin_layout Description
19192 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19193 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19194 except for the last page, if
19197 \begin_inset space ~
19205 \begin_layout Description
19209 \begin_inset space ~
19214 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19215 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19218 \begin_layout Description
19219 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19220 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19226 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19237 \begin_layout Standard
19238 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19239 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19240 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19246 In this context, first means first in this order:
19249 \begin_inset space ~
19261 \begin_inset space ~
19266 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19269 \begin_layout Standard
19271 \begin_inset Tabular
19272 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19273 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19274 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19275 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19276 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19277 <row endfirsthead="true">
19278 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19284 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19289 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19298 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19308 <row endfirsthead="true">
19309 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19320 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19329 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19341 <row endhead="true">
19342 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19353 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19362 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19372 <row endhead="true">
19373 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19384 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19393 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19405 <row endfoot="true">
19406 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19417 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19426 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19457 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20398 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20407 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20427 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20458 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20489 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20520 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20551 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20644 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20675 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20706 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20737 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20768 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20799 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20830 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20861 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20892 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20954 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20985 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21016 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21047 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21078 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21109 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21140 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21202 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21233 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21264 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21295 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21326 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21357 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21387 <row endlastfoot="true">
21388 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21399 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21408 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 \begin_layout Subsection
21427 \begin_inset Index idx
21430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21439 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21446 \begin_layout Standard
21447 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21448 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21449 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21450 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21454 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21457 \begin_layout Standard
21458 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21459 for the column in the table dialog.
21460 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21461 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21465 \begin_layout Standard
21467 \begin_inset Tabular
21468 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21469 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21470 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21471 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21472 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21492 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21617 This is longer now.
21622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21673 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21674 This is longer now.
21679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21705 \begin_layout Standard
21706 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21707 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21712 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21713 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21719 Selection with the mouse or with
21723 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21724 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21725 the selection from outside the table.
21728 \begin_layout Section
21730 \begin_inset Index idx
21733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21740 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21749 \begin_layout Subsection
21753 \begin_layout Standard
21754 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21755 have a fixed location.
21757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21764 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21772 \begin_inset space ~
21777 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21778 too many notes on the current page.
21781 \begin_layout Standard
21782 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21783 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21784 and pages without text.
21785 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21786 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21787 Floats are therefore numbered.
21788 Referencing is described in section
21789 \begin_inset space ~
21793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21795 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21802 \begin_layout Standard
21803 To insert a float, use the menu
21805 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21809 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21810 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21812 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21813 \begin_inset Index idx
21816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21822 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21823 paragraph within the float.
21824 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21825 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21826 left-clicking on the box label.
21827 A closed float box looks like this:
21828 \begin_inset Graphics
21829 filename clipart/float.png
21834 – a gray button with a red label.
21837 \begin_layout Standard
21838 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21840 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21843 \begin_layout Subsection
21845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21847 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21852 \begin_inset Index idx
21855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21856 Floats ! Figure floats
21864 \begin_layout Standard
21866 \begin_inset space ~
21870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21872 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21876 was created using the menu
21878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21879 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21885 arg "float-insert figure"
21889 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21892 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21898 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21902 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21903 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21905 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21907 \begin_inset space ~
21915 arg "layout-paragraph"
21921 \begin_layout Standard
21922 \begin_inset Float figure
21927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21929 \begin_inset Graphics
21930 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21940 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21945 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21949 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21962 \begin_layout Standard
21963 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21964 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21966 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21975 ) and refer to it using the menu
21977 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21983 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21987 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21988 vague references like
21989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21996 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
21997 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
21999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22007 For more about cross-references, see section
22008 \begin_inset space ~
22012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22014 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22021 \begin_layout Standard
22022 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22023 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22024 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22025 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22026 as described in section
22027 \begin_inset space ~
22031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22033 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22039 \begin_inset space ~
22043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22045 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22049 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22050 You can also set the images one below the other.
22052 \begin_inset space ~
22056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22058 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22065 reference "fig:Platypus"
22069 are the subfigures.
22072 \begin_layout Standard
22073 \begin_inset Float figure
22078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22079 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22083 \begin_inset Float figure
22088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22089 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22094 name "fig:Undefinable"
22106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22107 \begin_inset Graphics
22108 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22119 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22123 \begin_inset Float figure
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22129 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22134 name "fig:Platypus"
22146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22147 \begin_inset Graphics
22148 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22160 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22167 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22172 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22176 Two distorted images.
22189 \begin_layout Subsection
22191 \begin_inset Index idx
22194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22195 Floats ! Table floats
22203 \begin_layout Standard
22204 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22207 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22210 or the toolbar button
22213 arg "float-insert table"
22217 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22218 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22219 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22221 \begin_inset space ~
22225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22227 reference "tab:Table-float"
22234 \begin_layout Standard
22235 \begin_inset Float table
22240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22241 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22246 name "tab:Table-float"
22258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 \begin_inset Tabular
22261 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22262 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22263 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22264 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22265 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22392 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22413 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22416 \end{array}\right]$
22424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22437 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22458 \begin_layout Subsection
22460 \begin_inset Index idx
22463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22472 \begin_layout Standard
22474 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22475 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22476 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22478 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22486 \begin_inset space ~
22494 \begin_layout Section
22496 \begin_inset Index idx
22499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 \begin_layout Standard
22510 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22512 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22513 \begin_inset space \space{}
22520 \begin_layout Standard
22521 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22522 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22528 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22529 and its alignment within the page.
22532 \begin_layout Standard
22534 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22544 height_special "totalheight"
22549 backgroundcolor "none"
22552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 This is a minipage.
22556 The text is set in an italic style.
22559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22563 another formatting.
22571 \begin_layout Standard
22572 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22575 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22579 as described in section
22580 \begin_inset space ~
22584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22586 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22591 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22597 \begin_layout Standard
22598 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22608 height_special "totalheight"
22613 backgroundcolor "none"
22616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22618 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22624 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22628 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22638 height_special "totalheight"
22643 backgroundcolor "none"
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22647 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22648 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22656 \begin_layout Standard
22657 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22663 \begin_layout Standard
22664 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22666 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22673 \begin_inset space ~
22681 \begin_layout Chapter
22682 Mathematical Formulas
22683 \begin_inset Index idx
22686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22693 \begin_inset Index idx
22696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22727 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22734 \begin_layout Standard
22735 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22740 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22743 \begin_layout Section
22745 \begin_inset Index idx
22748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22757 \begin_layout Standard
22758 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22771 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22773 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22774 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22775 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22783 \begin_layout Standard
22784 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22788 \begin_inset space ~
22793 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22796 \begin_layout Standard
22797 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22798 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22801 \begin_layout Standard
22802 This is a line with an inline formula
22803 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22809 \begin_layout Standard
22810 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22811 paragraph, like this one:
22812 \begin_inset Formula
22819 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22822 \begin_layout Standard
22824 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22826 For example, typing
22827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22840 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22841 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22845 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22848 \begin_inset space ~
22856 \begin_layout Subsection
22857 Navigating in Formulas
22858 \begin_inset Index idx
22861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22870 \begin_layout Standard
22871 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22872 achieved with the arrow keys.
22874 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22875 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22880 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22881 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22885 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22889 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22892 \end{array}\right]$
22900 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22905 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22906 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22909 \begin_layout Standard
22914 , printed in this document as
22915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22919 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22926 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22927 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22928 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22933 For example, if you want
22934 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22942 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22952 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22956 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22961 , since in the latter case only the
22964 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22969 will be under the square root sign:
22970 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22976 \begin_layout Standard
22977 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22979 \begin_inset Formula
22981 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22990 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22991 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22994 \begin_layout Subsection
22998 \begin_layout Standard
22999 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23000 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23004 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23005 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23006 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23007 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23008 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23012 \begin_layout Subsection
23013 Exponents and Subscripts
23014 \begin_inset Index idx
23017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23024 \begin_inset Index idx
23027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23036 \begin_layout Standard
23037 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23040 arg "math-superscript"
23046 arg "math-subscript"
23049 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23051 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23054 , type in a formula
23057 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23067 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23073 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23077 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23083 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23089 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23098 , you have to use an extra
23102 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23103 For example, if you want
23104 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23110 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23116 Subscripts are similar: To get
23117 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23123 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23131 \begin_layout Subsection
23133 \begin_inset Index idx
23136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23145 \begin_layout Standard
23146 Create a fraction either with the command
23152 or by using the icon
23155 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23161 \begin_inset space ~
23167 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23168 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23169 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23174 To move back up, press
23179 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23180 \begin_inset Formula
23182 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23185 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23193 \begin_layout Subsection
23195 \begin_inset Index idx
23198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23207 \begin_layout Standard
23208 Roots can be created using the
23211 \begin_inset space ~
23219 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23225 arg "math-insert \\root"
23247 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23253 always produces a square root.
23256 \begin_layout Subsection
23257 Operators with Limits
23258 \begin_inset Index idx
23261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23268 \begin_inset Index idx
23271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23280 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23287 \begin_layout Standard
23289 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23293 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23296 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23297 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23298 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23299 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23300 The sum operator will automatically place its
23301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23308 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23310 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23314 \begin_inset Formula
23316 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23321 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23325 \begin_layout Standard
23326 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23328 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23329 behind the operator and using the menu
23331 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23332 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23334 \begin_inset space ~
23338 \begin_inset space ~
23352 \begin_layout Standard
23353 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23362 \begin_inset Index idx
23365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23372 \begin_inset Formula
23374 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23379 which will place the
23380 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23392 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23393 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23399 \begin_layout Standard
23400 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23407 Have a look at section
23408 \begin_inset space ~
23412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23414 reference "subsec:Functions"
23418 for an explanation of function macros.
23421 \begin_layout Subsection
23423 \begin_inset Index idx
23426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23435 \begin_layout Standard
23436 Most math symbols can be found in the
23439 \begin_inset space ~
23444 under one of several categories; including
23461 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23465 \begin_layout Standard
23466 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23467 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23468 don't have to use the
23471 \begin_inset space ~
23476 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23478 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23481 \begin_layout Subsection
23483 \begin_inset Index idx
23486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23495 \begin_layout Standard
23496 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23502 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23508 \begin_inset space ~
23516 arg "math-insert \\space"
23520 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23521 For example, the sequence
23526 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23529 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23531 \begin_inset Graphics
23532 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23537 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23538 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23539 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23540 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23541 , because they are negative
23543 Here are two examples:
23546 \begin_layout Standard
23556 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23562 \begin_layout Standard
23572 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23578 \begin_layout Subsection
23580 \begin_inset Index idx
23583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23592 name "subsec:Functions"
23599 \begin_layout Standard
23603 \begin_inset space ~
23608 contains under the button
23611 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23614 a number of function macros, such as
23615 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23619 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23627 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23634 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23635 avoid confusions, because
23636 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23640 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23646 \begin_layout Standard
23647 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23649 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23653 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23659 \begin_layout Standard
23660 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23661 are placed, as described in section
23662 \begin_inset space ~
23666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23668 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23675 \begin_layout Subsection
23677 \begin_inset Index idx
23680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23689 \begin_layout Standard
23690 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23692 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23693 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23694 commands, for example, to enter
23695 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23698 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23699 Our example is entered by typing
23704 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23711 \begin_inset space ~
23715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23717 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23721 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23724 \begin_layout Standard
23725 \begin_inset Float table
23730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23731 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23736 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23740 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23750 \begin_inset Tabular
23751 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23752 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23753 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23754 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23755 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23839 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23893 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23947 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24001 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24055 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24109 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24163 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24217 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24271 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24316 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24337 \begin_layout Standard
24338 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24341 \begin_inset space ~
24349 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24352 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24356 \begin_layout Section
24357 Brackets and Delimiters
24358 \begin_inset Index idx
24361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24368 \begin_inset Index idx
24371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24380 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24387 \begin_layout Standard
24388 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24390 For some purposes, using just the keys
24395 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24396 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24397 toolbar delimiter icon
24400 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24404 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24405 \begin_inset Formula
24407 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24415 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24416 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24420 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24423 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24429 \begin_inset Formula
24431 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24439 \begin_layout Standard
24440 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24441 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24445 \begin_layout Standard
24446 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24447 left side and right side.
24448 If you use the option
24451 \begin_inset space ~
24456 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24457 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24459 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24464 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24465 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24468 \begin_layout Standard
24469 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24470 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24471 is to go inside the brackets.
24472 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24477 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24478 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24479 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24483 arg "math-delim ( )"
24489 \begin_layout Section
24490 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24491 \begin_inset Index idx
24494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24501 \begin_inset Index idx
24504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24511 \begin_inset Index idx
24514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24515 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24523 \begin_layout Standard
24524 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24528 \begin_inset space ~
24536 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24540 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24541 Here is an example:
24542 \begin_inset Formula
24544 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24553 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24554 \begin_inset space ~
24558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24560 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24565 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24566 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24567 This alignment is set in the box
24572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24621 for every column as default.
24622 For example, the sequence
24623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24634 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24635 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24636 corresponds to the relevant column.
24637 The result will look like this:
24638 \begin_inset Formula
24641 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24642 column & has & has\,right\\
24643 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24652 \begin_layout Standard
24653 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24656 arg "newline-insert newline"
24659 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24660 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24662 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24665 or the math toolbar.
24668 \begin_layout Standard
24669 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24670 It can be created with the menu
24672 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24673 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24675 \begin_inset space ~
24687 Here is an example:
24688 \begin_inset Formula
24702 \begin_layout Standard
24703 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24706 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24709 arg "newline-insert newline"
24713 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24718 arg "newline-insert newline"
24721 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24729 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24730 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24731 A new row is created by every further entry of
24734 arg "newline-insert newline"
24738 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24739 Here is an example:
24740 \begin_inset Formula
24742 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24743 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24748 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24749 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24750 \begin_inset Formula
24752 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24760 \begin_layout Standard
24761 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24768 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24769 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24772 reference "eq:asquared"
24777 The other types are described in section
24778 \begin_inset space ~
24782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24784 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24791 \begin_layout Section
24792 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24793 \begin_inset Index idx
24796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24797 Math ! Formula numbering
24803 \begin_inset Index idx
24806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24807 Math ! Referencing formulas
24813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24815 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24822 \begin_layout Standard
24823 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24825 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24826 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24828 \begin_inset space ~
24832 \begin_inset space ~
24840 arg "math-number-toggle"
24844 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24845 within parentheses.
24846 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24847 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24848 the document class.
24849 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24850 separated by a dot:
24851 \begin_inset Formula
24861 arg "math-number-toggle"
24864 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24865 You can only number displayed formulas.
24868 \begin_layout Standard
24869 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24871 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24872 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24874 \begin_inset space ~
24878 \begin_inset space ~
24886 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24889 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24890 \begin_inset Formula
24893 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24899 To number all lines use the shortcut
24902 arg "math-number-toggle"
24908 \begin_layout Standard
24909 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24912 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24913 A label is inserted with the menu
24915 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24924 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24925 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24926 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24938 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24939 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24940 We inserted in the following example the label
24941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24948 in the second line:
24949 \begin_inset Formula
24951 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24952 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24957 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24958 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24959 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24963 \begin_inset space ~
24971 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24975 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24976 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24977 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24978 as the formula number:
24981 \begin_layout Standard
24982 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24985 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24992 \begin_layout Standard
24993 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
24994 's cross-reference box are described in section
24995 \begin_inset space ~
24999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25001 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25006 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25014 \begin_layout Section
25015 User defined math macros
25016 \begin_inset Index idx
25019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25028 \begin_layout Standard
25030 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25031 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25032 Math macros are explained in section
25035 \begin_inset space ~
25047 \begin_layout Section
25051 \begin_layout Subsection
25053 \begin_inset Index idx
25056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25065 \begin_layout Standard
25066 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25067 To set a font in a formula, use the
25070 \begin_inset space ~
25078 arg "math-insert \\font"
25081 , or enter its command, listed in table
25082 \begin_inset space ~
25086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25088 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25095 \begin_layout Standard
25096 \begin_inset Float table
25101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25102 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25107 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25111 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25121 \begin_inset Tabular
25122 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25123 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25124 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25125 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25157 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25184 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25244 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25271 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25298 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25332 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25359 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25393 \begin_layout Standard
25394 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25402 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25418 \begin_layout Standard
25419 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25420 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25425 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25426 space when you need a space in the box.
25427 Here is an example where
25428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25439 denotes the set of numbers:
25440 \begin_inset Formula
25442 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25450 \begin_layout Standard
25451 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25452 You can, for example, put a character in
25461 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25465 \begin_inset Newline newline
25468 So it is better not to use this feature.
25471 \begin_layout Standard
25472 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25473 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25477 \begin_inset Newline newline
25480 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25486 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25487 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25493 \begin_layout Standard
25500 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25503 \begin_layout Standard
25504 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25506 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25507 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25509 \begin_inset space ~
25517 \begin_layout Subsection
25519 \begin_inset Index idx
25522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 \begin_layout Standard
25532 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25534 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25538 \begin_inset space ~
25542 \begin_inset space ~
25550 \begin_inset space ~
25558 arg "math-insert \\font"
25562 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25563 in black instead of blue.
25564 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25565 Here is an example:
25566 \begin_inset Formula
25569 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25570 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25579 \begin_layout Subsection
25581 \begin_inset Index idx
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25593 \begin_layout Standard
25594 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25595 automatically chosen in most situations.
25613 For most characters,
25621 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25622 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25627 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25628 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25629 thinks are appropriate.
25630 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25633 arg "math-insert \\style"
25637 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25638 For example, you can set
25639 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25642 , which is normally in
25651 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25655 The four styles are used in the following example:
25658 \begin_layout Standard
25659 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25663 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25667 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25671 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25677 \begin_layout Standard
25678 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25679 is set in a particular size with the menu
25681 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25683 \begin_inset space ~
25688 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25689 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25690 will be adjusted to correspond.
25691 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25702 \begin_layout Standard
25706 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25712 \begin_layout Section
25713 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25715 \begin_inset Index idx
25718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25725 \begin_inset Index idx
25728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25737 \begin_layout Standard
25739 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25740 that are in common use.
25743 \begin_layout Subsection
25744 Enabling AMS-Support
25747 \begin_layout Standard
25748 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25749 the document by selecting the checkbox
25752 \begin_inset space ~
25756 \begin_inset space ~
25760 \begin_inset space ~
25767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25771 \begin_inset Index idx
25774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25775 Document ! Settings
25783 \begin_inset space ~
25789 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25790 -errors in formulas,
25791 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25794 \begin_layout Subsection
25796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25798 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25803 \begin_inset Index idx
25806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25807 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25815 \begin_layout Standard
25816 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25817 provides a selection of different formula types.
25819 allows you to choose between
25840 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25841 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25847 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25850 \begin_layout Chapter
25854 \begin_layout Section
25856 \begin_inset Index idx
25859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25868 name "sec:Cross-References"
25875 \begin_layout Standard
25876 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25877 's strengths is cross-references.
25878 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25880 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25881 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25882 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25885 \begin_layout Enumerate
25889 \begin_layout Enumerate
25890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25892 name "enu:Second-item"
25899 \begin_layout Enumerate
25903 \begin_layout Standard
25904 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25909 or by pressing the toolbar button
25916 A gray label box like this:
25917 \begin_inset Graphics
25918 filename clipart/label.png
25923 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25925 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25960 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25961 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25977 \begin_layout Standard
25978 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25980 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25983 or the toolbar button
25986 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25990 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25991 \begin_inset Graphics
25992 filename clipart/reference.png
25997 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25999 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26012 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26016 \begin_layout Standard
26017 As an alternative to
26019 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26022 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26027 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26028 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26030 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26042 \begin_layout Standard
26043 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26044 \begin_inset space ~
26048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26050 reference "enu:Second-item"
26057 \begin_layout Standard
26058 It is recommended to use a protected space
26062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26063 described in section
26064 \begin_inset space ~
26068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26070 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26079 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26080 line breaks between them.
26083 \begin_layout Standard
26084 There are six formats of cross-references:
26087 \begin_layout Description
26088 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26091 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26098 \begin_layout Description
26099 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26100 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26112 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26119 \begin_layout Description
26120 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26121 \begin_inset space ~
26125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26126 LatexCommand pageref
26127 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26134 \begin_layout Description
26136 \begin_inset space ~
26140 \begin_inset space ~
26143 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26145 LatexCommand vpageref
26146 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26151 \begin_inset Newline newline
26154 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26155 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26156 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26157 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26158 it prints “on the next page”.
26159 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26162 \begin_layout Description
26164 \begin_inset space ~
26168 \begin_inset space ~
26172 \begin_inset space ~
26175 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26178 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26183 \begin_inset Newline newline
26186 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26192 ; otherwise it behaves like
26196 \begin_inset space ~
26200 \begin_inset space ~
26209 \begin_layout Description
26211 \begin_inset space ~
26214 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26215 \begin_inset Newline newline
26219 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26227 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26237 \begin_inset Index idx
26240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26242 -packages ! prettyref
26248 \begin_inset Index idx
26251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26253 -packages ! refstyle
26264 \begin_inset Newline newline
26267 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26268 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26271 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26275 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26276 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26284 is the default and preferred because
26288 supports only English documents.
26289 The format is specified by using the command
26301 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26302 preamble of the document.
26303 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26316 ) can be done with this command
26317 \begin_inset Newline newline
26324 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26329 \begin_inset Newline newline
26332 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26334 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26336 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26343 \begin_layout Description
26345 \begin_inset space ~
26348 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26350 LatexCommand nameref
26351 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26358 \begin_layout Standard
26359 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26360 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26362 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26366 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26370 \begin_layout Standard
26371 You can only use the style
26375 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26379 is always possible.
26382 \begin_layout Standard
26383 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26384 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26386 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26387 \begin_inset space ~
26391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26393 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26400 \begin_layout Standard
26401 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26405 \begin_inset space ~
26409 \begin_inset space ~
26414 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26415 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26418 \begin_inset space ~
26423 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26424 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26427 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26433 \begin_layout Standard
26434 You can change labels at any time.
26435 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26436 do not need to think about this.
26439 \begin_layout Standard
26440 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26442 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26446 \begin_layout Standard
26447 References are described in detail in the section
26448 \begin_inset space ~
26458 \begin_inset space ~
26466 \begin_layout Section
26467 Table of Contents and other Listings
26468 \begin_inset Index idx
26471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26478 \begin_inset Index idx
26481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26482 Navigating ! Outline
26488 \begin_inset Index idx
26491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26507 \begin_layout Subsection
26509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26511 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26518 \begin_layout Standard
26519 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26521 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26522 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26524 \begin_inset space ~
26528 \begin_inset space ~
26534 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26536 If you click on it, the
26540 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26541 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26542 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26544 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26546 \begin_inset space ~
26551 that is described in section
26552 \begin_inset space ~
26556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26558 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26565 \begin_layout Standard
26566 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26567 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26569 \begin_inset space ~
26573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26575 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26579 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26581 \begin_inset space ~
26585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26587 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26591 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26593 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26596 \begin_layout Subsection
26597 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26600 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26607 \begin_layout Standard
26608 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26610 You can insert them via the
26612 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26616 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26619 \begin_layout Section
26620 URLs and Hyperlinks
26621 \begin_inset Index idx
26624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26631 \begin_inset Index idx
26634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26643 \begin_layout Subsection
26645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26654 \begin_layout Standard
26655 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26663 \begin_layout Standard
26664 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26666 \begin_inset Flex URL
26669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26679 \begin_layout Standard
26680 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26686 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26690 \begin_layout Standard
26691 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26699 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26708 \begin_layout Subsection
26710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26712 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26719 \begin_layout Standard
26720 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26722 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26725 or with the toolbar button
26732 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26741 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26742 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26743 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26745 name "LyX's homepage"
26746 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26750 , an Email address like this:
26751 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26753 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26754 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26759 , or a link to a file.
26762 \begin_layout Standard
26763 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26776 to the link target.
26779 \begin_layout Standard
26780 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26781 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26782 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26783 the text style dialog.
26784 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26788 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26790 name "LyX's homepage"
26791 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26798 \begin_layout Standard
26799 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26803 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26805 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26806 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26810 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26812 \begin_inset Newline newline
26820 \begin_inset Newline newline
26827 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26830 \begin_layout Section
26832 \begin_inset Index idx
26835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26844 name "sec:Appendices"
26851 \begin_layout Standard
26852 Appendices are created with the menu
26854 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26856 \begin_inset space ~
26860 \begin_inset space ~
26866 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26867 as the appendix part of the book.
26868 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26871 \begin_layout Standard
26872 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26873 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26874 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26875 and the subsection number.
26876 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26880 \begin_layout Standard
26882 \begin_inset space ~
26886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26888 reference "chap:Credits"
26893 \begin_inset space ~
26897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26899 reference "subsec:Export"
26906 \begin_layout Section
26908 \begin_inset Index idx
26911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26920 name "sec:Bibliography"
26927 \begin_layout Standard
26928 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26930 You can include a bibliography database,
26934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26935 Known under the name
26936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26939 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26949 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26950 manually, using the paragraph environment
26954 , which was described in section
26955 \begin_inset space ~
26959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26961 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
26966 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26967 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26971 use a bibliography database.
26974 \begin_layout Subsection
26975 The Bibliography Environment
26978 \begin_layout Standard
26983 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26985 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26994 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26996 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
26999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27006 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27009 \begin_layout Standard
27010 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27015 or the toolbar button
27018 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27022 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27023 containing the available citations.
27024 Select one or more keys from the list and
27034 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27035 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27039 \begin_layout Standard
27040 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27041 entry with surrounding brackets.
27046 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27047 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27059 \begin_layout Standard
27063 Companion Second Edition
27066 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27068 key "latexcompanion"
27075 \begin_layout Standard
27076 The \SpecialChar LyX
27077 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27078 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27087 \begin_layout Standard
27088 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27091 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27093 \begin_inset space ~
27101 arg "layout-paragraph"
27105 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27108 \begin_layout Subsection
27109 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27111 \begin_inset Index idx
27114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27115 Bibliography ! Databases
27121 \begin_inset Index idx
27124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27125 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27134 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27141 \begin_layout Standard
27142 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27148 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27150 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27151 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27156 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27158 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27159 your working field in a database.
27160 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27161 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27162 list for that document.
27163 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27167 \begin_layout Standard
27168 The database is a text file with the file extension
27169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27180 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27181 The format is explained in
27182 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27188 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27190 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27192 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27197 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27198 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27199 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27201 \begin_inset Flex URL
27204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27206 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27214 \begin_layout Standard
27215 To use a database, use the menu
27217 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27222 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27224 \begin_inset space ~
27230 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27231 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27238 Add bibliography to TOC
27240 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27245 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27246 in the document or just the cited references.
27249 \begin_layout Standard
27250 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27262 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27263 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27264 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27265 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27267 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27273 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27274 \begin_inset Newline newline
27278 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27280 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27292 \begin_layout Standard
27293 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27296 \begin_layout Standard
27297 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27298 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27300 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27307 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27308 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27313 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27314 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27315 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27319 The following variants are possible:
27322 \begin_layout Description
27323 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27324 with other bibliography packages (e.
27325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27329 \begin_inset space \space{}
27336 ), only with the package
27340 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27344 \begin_layout Description
27345 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27346 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27347 with all bibliography packages, except
27352 \begin_layout Description
27353 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27358 , works with all bibliography packages
27361 \begin_layout Standard
27362 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27363 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27365 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27368 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27372 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27381 \begin_layout Standard
27382 When you select the option
27384 Sectioned bibliography
27388 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27389 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27392 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27393 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27395 Customizing Bibliographies
27399 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27404 Additional Features
27409 \begin_layout Standard
27410 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27411 the two methods of creating them.
27412 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27413 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27414 We used the style file
27418 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27421 \begin_layout Subsection
27423 \begin_inset Index idx
27426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27427 Bibliography ! Citation format
27435 \begin_layout Standard
27436 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27437 For this feature you need to enable the option
27443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27447 \begin_inset Index idx
27450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27451 Document ! Settings
27461 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27462 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27463 style files as explained in
27464 the previous section.
27467 \begin_layout Standard
27468 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27469 the citation reference window.
27470 Here is an example where the text
27471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27475 \begin_inset space ~
27479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27482 appears after the reference:
27485 \begin_layout Standard
27487 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27490 key "latexcompanion"
27497 \begin_layout Section
27499 \begin_inset Index idx
27502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27518 \begin_layout Standard
27519 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27521 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27523 \begin_inset space ~
27528 or the toolbar button
27535 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27536 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27537 by \SpecialChar LyX
27538 as the index entry.
27541 \begin_layout Standard
27542 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27545 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27547 \begin_inset space ~
27553 A light blue box labeled
27554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27565 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27566 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27570 \begin_layout Standard
27571 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27572 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27573 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27574 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27576 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27578 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27585 \begin_layout Subsection
27586 Grouping Index Entries
27587 \begin_inset Index idx
27590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27599 \begin_layout Standard
27600 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27602 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27603 lists under the entry
27604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27612 First we create the entry
27613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27621 \begin_inset space ~
27625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27627 reference "subsec:Lists"
27632 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27633 \begin_inset space ~
27637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27639 reference "sec:Itemize"
27643 , we insert the command
27646 \begin_layout Standard
27652 \begin_layout Standard
27656 \begin_layout Standard
27662 \begin_layout Standard
27663 for the enumerated list in section
27664 \begin_inset space ~
27668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27670 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27677 \begin_layout Standard
27678 The exclamation mark
27679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27686 marks the grouping levels.
27687 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27688 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27689 If we don't have an index entry for
27690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27697 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27700 \begin_layout Subsection
27702 \begin_inset Index idx
27705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27706 Index ! Page ranges
27714 \begin_layout Standard
27715 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27717 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27718 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27719 an index entry in section
27720 \begin_inset space ~
27724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27726 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27733 \begin_layout Standard
27736 Paragraph environments|(
27739 \begin_layout Standard
27740 and another entry at the end of section
27741 \begin_inset space ~
27745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27747 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27754 \begin_layout Standard
27757 Paragraph environments|)
27760 \begin_layout Standard
27762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27785 respectively start and end the index range.
27786 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27787 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27788 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27789 An example is the index entry
27790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27793 Document ! Settings
27794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27800 \begin_layout Subsection
27802 \begin_inset Index idx
27805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27806 Index ! Cross referencing
27814 \begin_layout Standard
27815 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27816 We referred for example in the index entry
27817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27825 \begin_inset space ~
27829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27831 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27835 ) to the index entry
27836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27843 in the same section using the entry
27846 \begin_layout Standard
27849 GIF|see{Image formats}
27852 \begin_layout Standard
27853 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27855 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27856 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27859 \begin_layout Subsection
27861 \begin_inset Index idx
27864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27865 Index ! Entry order
27873 \begin_layout Standard
27874 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27875 follow the rules for the index order.
27876 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27882 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27884 \begin_inset space ~
27888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27890 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27899 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27900 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27925 \begin_inset Index idx
27928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27929 Dummy entries ! maïs
27935 \begin_inset Index idx
27938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27939 Dummy entries ! maître
27945 \begin_inset Index idx
27948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27949 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27954 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27955 maïs, maison, maître.
27956 To achieve this, we use the command
27959 \begin_layout Standard
27962 previous entry@current entry
27965 \begin_layout Standard
27966 In our case we want to have
27967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27982 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27985 \begin_layout Standard
27991 \begin_layout Standard
27992 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27993 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
27995 See the next subsection for an example.
27998 \begin_layout Standard
27999 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28005 \begin_layout Standard
28006 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28011 to generate the index (see sec.
28012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28018 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28027 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28028 -package aeguill in sec.
28029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28035 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28039 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28040 -packages although all these index
28041 commands start with
28042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28055 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28060 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28063 \begin_layout Standard
28075 \begin_layout Standard
28087 \begin_layout Subsection
28089 \begin_inset Index idx
28092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28093 Index ! Entry layout
28101 \begin_layout Standard
28102 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28103 \begin_inset Index idx
28106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28109 This is an italic dummy entry
28114 You can also format the page number using the character
28115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28122 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28123 -command without a backslash.
28124 We can write for example
28127 \begin_layout Standard
28130 italic page number:|textit
28133 \begin_layout Standard
28134 to get the page number in italic.
28135 \begin_inset Index idx
28138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28139 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28144 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28145 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28163 \begin_inset space ~
28169 Have a look at section
28170 \begin_inset space ~
28174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28176 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28180 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28184 \begin_layout Standard
28185 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28193 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28197 to generate the index, see sec.
28198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28204 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28213 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28218 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28219 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28222 key "latexcompanion"
28234 \begin_layout Standard
28235 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28237 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28238 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28239 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28240 If so, put the following in the preamble
28243 \begin_layout Standard
28255 \begin_layout Standard
28259 \begin_layout Standard
28265 \begin_layout Standard
28266 in the index entry.
28267 \begin_inset Index idx
28270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28271 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28276 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28277 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28278 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28281 \begin_layout Standard
28282 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28283 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28284 a bold font for all index entries.
28285 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28297 documentation for details,
28298 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28300 key "makeindex,xindy"
28307 \begin_layout Subsection
28309 \begin_inset Index idx
28312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28321 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28328 \begin_layout Standard
28329 If the index generation program
28333 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28334 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28338 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28339 distribution, is used.
28343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28348 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28349 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28350 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28351 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28352 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28362 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28364 dialog, see section
28365 \begin_inset space ~
28369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28371 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28376 The available options are listed and explained in
28377 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28379 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28384 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28388 \begin_layout Standard
28389 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28390 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28394 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28398 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28399 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28402 \begin_layout Subsection
28406 \begin_layout Standard
28407 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28408 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28416 next to the standard index.
28418 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28419 that add this feature.
28426 \begin_inset Index idx
28429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28431 -packages ! splitidx
28436 package to generate multiple indexes.
28437 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28443 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28445 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28452 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28453 style, but it also includes
28454 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28455 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28463 \begin_layout Standard
28464 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28465 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28468 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28471 and select the option
28473 Use multiple Indexes
28480 already contains the standard index
28481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28489 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28490 also appear as a heading) to the
28494 input field and press the
28499 The new index now also appears in the list.
28500 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28501 label color to the new index.
28504 \begin_layout Standard
28505 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28508 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28515 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28516 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28517 are additional features:
28520 \begin_layout Itemize
28521 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28522 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28525 \begin_layout Itemize
28526 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28527 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28535 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28536 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28537 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28538 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28541 \begin_layout Section
28542 Nomenclature/Glossary
28543 \begin_inset Index idx
28546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28553 \begin_inset Index idx
28556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28587 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28594 \begin_layout Standard
28595 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28596 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28597 called nomenclature or glossary.
28600 \begin_layout Standard
28601 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28608 \begin_inset Index idx
28611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28613 -packages ! nomencl
28619 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28621 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28627 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28631 \begin_layout Standard
28632 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28633 and then use the menu
28635 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28641 \begin_inset space ~
28646 or the toolbar button
28649 arg "nomencl-insert"
28654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28665 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28668 \begin_layout Standard
28669 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28670 The first is the term or
28674 that you wish to define.
28679 of the term or symbol.
28682 \begin_layout Standard
28683 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28691 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28692 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28700 \begin_layout Subsection
28701 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28702 \begin_inset Index idx
28705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28706 Nomenclature ! Layout
28714 \begin_layout Standard
28715 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28719 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28726 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28734 \begin_inset Newline newline
28742 \begin_inset Newline newline
28748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28755 character starts/ends the formula.
28756 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28757 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28769 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28779 \begin_layout Standard
28780 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28781 -syntax is given in section
28782 \begin_inset space ~
28786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28788 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28795 \begin_layout Standard
28799 \begin_inset space ~
28804 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28806 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28811 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28818 in this document is:
28819 \begin_inset Newline newline
28824 dummy entry for the character
28829 \begin_inset Newline newline
28841 \begin_inset space ~
28851 font use the command
28880 \begin_layout Standard
28881 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28886 \begin_inset space \space{}
28890 \begin_inset Newline newline
28906 \begin_inset Newline newline
28909 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28910 This command will make the font of all symbols
28917 \begin_inset space ~
28925 \begin_layout Standard
28926 If the characters |
28927 \begin_inset space \space{}
28931 \begin_inset space \space{}
28935 \begin_inset space \space{}
28939 \begin_inset space \space{}
28943 \begin_inset space \space{}
28946 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28947 a quote character in front of them.
28948 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28949 LatexCommand nomenclature
28950 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28951 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28958 \begin_layout Subsection
28959 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28960 \begin_inset Index idx
28963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28964 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28972 \begin_layout Standard
28973 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28974 -code of the symbol
28976 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28978 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28981 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28982 LatexCommand nomenclature
28984 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28991 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28995 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28996 LatexCommand nomenclature
28999 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29004 They will be sorted by
29005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29031 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29034 will be sorted before the
29038 since the character
29039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29046 is considered in sorting.
29049 \begin_layout Standard
29050 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29053 \begin_inset space ~
29058 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29059 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29061 For the example given, you can insert
29065 in this field for the
29066 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29073 will be located before
29074 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29080 \begin_layout Standard
29081 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29086 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29095 \begin_layout Subsection
29096 Nomenclature Options
29097 \begin_inset Index idx
29100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29101 Nomenclature ! Options
29109 \begin_layout Standard
29114 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29115 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29118 \begin_layout Description
29119 refeq Appends the phrase
29120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29135 to every nomenclature entry, where
29141 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29144 \begin_layout Description
29145 refpage Appends the phrase
29146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29161 to every nomenclature entry, where
29167 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29170 \begin_layout Description
29171 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29174 \begin_layout Standard
29175 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29176 class options list in the
29178 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29182 In this document the options
29189 \begin_layout Standard
29190 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29196 \begin_layout Standard
29197 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29198 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29203 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29206 \begin_layout Description
29216 \begin_layout Description
29219 nomrefpage Like the
29226 \begin_layout Description
29229 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29238 \begin_layout Description
29242 \begin_inset space ~
29248 \begin_inset space ~
29253 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29256 \begin_layout Standard
29258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29265 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29266 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29270 \begin_layout Standard
29278 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29281 \begin_inset Newline newline
29288 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29293 \begin_inset Newline newline
29297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29312 by their translation.
29315 \begin_layout Subsection
29316 Printing the Nomenclature
29317 \begin_inset Index idx
29320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29321 Nomenclature ! Printing
29329 \begin_layout Standard
29330 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29332 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29333 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29349 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29350 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29351 You can choose between these settings:
29354 \begin_layout Description
29355 Default a space of 1
29356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29362 \begin_layout Description
29364 \begin_inset space ~
29368 \begin_inset space ~
29371 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29374 \begin_layout Description
29375 Custom custom space
29378 \begin_layout Standard
29379 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29388 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29396 For example, in order to change the name to
29400 , add the following line to the preamble:
29403 \begin_layout Standard
29411 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29414 \begin_layout Subsection
29415 Nomenclature Program
29416 \begin_inset Index idx
29419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29420 Nomenclature ! Program
29426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29428 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29435 \begin_layout Standard
29441 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29442 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29444 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29449 by adding options, see section
29450 \begin_inset space ~
29454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29456 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29461 The available options are listed and explained in
29462 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29464 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29471 \begin_layout Section
29473 \begin_inset Index idx
29476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29483 \begin_inset Index idx
29486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29487 Document ! Branches
29493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29495 name "sec:Branches"
29502 \begin_layout Standard
29503 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29504 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29505 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29506 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29509 \begin_layout Standard
29510 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29511 allows you to put text into branches.
29512 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29513 To create a branch, either select the menu
29515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29516 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29519 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29528 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29529 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29530 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29531 and whether the name of the branch should
29532 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29533 (see below for an example).
29534 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29535 to the name of the other) and to add
29536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29548 \begin_inset space ~
29551 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29552 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29555 \begin_layout Standard
29556 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29557 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29559 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29562 where you can choose a branch.
29563 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29567 \begin_layout Standard
29568 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29569 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29572 \begin_layout Standard
29573 \begin_inset Branch Question
29576 \begin_layout Standard
29577 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29585 \begin_layout Standard
29586 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29589 \begin_layout Standard
29590 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29598 \begin_layout Standard
29605 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29606 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29609 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29610 Consider for example a file
29611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29618 which has the above branches.
29620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29627 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29651 branch were inactive,
29652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29667 branch was active, likewise
29668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29683 branch was active, and
29684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29687 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29691 if both branches were active.
29692 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29695 \begin_layout Standard
29696 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29702 \begin_layout Standard
29703 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29704 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29705 definitions for each branch.
29706 For example you can define for the question branch
29710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29711 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29712 -syntax, see section
29713 \begin_inset space ~
29717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29719 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29731 \begin_layout Standard
29741 \begin_layout Standard
29751 \begin_layout Standard
29752 and for the answer branch
29755 \begin_layout Standard
29765 \begin_layout Standard
29775 \begin_layout Standard
29776 \begin_inset Branch Question
29779 \begin_layout Standard
29783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29811 \begin_layout Standard
29812 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29815 \begin_layout Standard
29819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29847 \begin_layout Standard
29848 Now it is possible to use the
29852 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29859 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29862 commands to obtain conditional output.
29863 Here is an example formula where only the
29870 \begin_inset Formula
29872 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29880 \begin_layout Standard
29881 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29889 \begin_layout Standard
29890 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29892 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29896 \begin_inset space \space{}
29899 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29901 For this advanced usage, see the
29907 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29912 \begin_layout Section
29914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29916 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29921 \begin_inset Index idx
29924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29933 \begin_layout Standard
29936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29937 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29940 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29942 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29948 \begin_inset Index idx
29951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29953 -packages ! hyperref
29958 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29959 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29960 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29961 part of the document.
29965 \begin_layout Standard
29966 The header information in the dialog tab
29970 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29971 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29972 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29973 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29977 \begin_inset space ~
29981 \begin_inset space ~
29986 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
29987 tries to extract the header information from your document title
29988 and author entries.
29992 \begin_inset space ~
29996 \begin_inset space ~
30000 \begin_inset space ~
30005 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30008 \begin_layout Standard
30009 You can specify in the dialog tab
30013 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30018 \begin_inset space ~
30022 \begin_inset space ~
30026 \begin_inset space ~
30031 option allows long links to be split;
30034 \begin_inset space ~
30038 \begin_inset space ~
30042 \begin_inset space ~
30050 \begin_inset space ~
30055 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30058 \begin_inset space ~
30063 colors the different links.
30064 The default colors are:
30067 \begin_layout Labeling
30068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30073 for hyperlinks and URLs
30076 \begin_layout Labeling
30077 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30085 \begin_layout Labeling
30086 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30094 \begin_layout Standard
30095 but you can change these in the field
30100 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30103 \begin_layout Standard
30106 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30109 \begin_layout Standard
30114 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30115 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30116 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30119 \begin_layout Standard
30124 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30125 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30126 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30136 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30137 when opening the PDF.
30139 \begin_inset space ~
30142 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30143 \begin_inset space ~
30146 1 will only display the sections.
30149 \begin_layout Standard
30150 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30151 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30157 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30158 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30167 \begin_layout Section
30169 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30173 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30180 \begin_layout Subsection
30183 \begin_inset Index idx
30186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30196 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30203 \begin_layout Standard
30204 As \SpecialChar LyX
30205 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30206 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30207 commands and constructs,
30210 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30211 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30212 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30213 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30214 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30215 cannot support all packages and
30219 \begin_layout Standard
30220 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30221 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30222 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30226 Code box is created by the menu
30228 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30230 \begin_inset space ~
30235 or by the toolbar button
30248 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30256 \begin_layout Standard
30257 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30259 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30261 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30262 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30269 , you can write the command part
30275 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30276 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30280 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30281 Code box behind the word.
30282 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30283 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30287 \begin_layout Standard
30288 \begin_inset Graphics
30289 filename clipart/ERT.png
30297 \begin_layout Standard
30301 \begin_layout Standard
30302 This is a line with a
30306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30329 \begin_layout Standard
30330 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30338 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30339 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30340 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30341 know that the command is finished.
30349 \begin_layout Subsection
30350 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30352 \begin_inset Argument 1
30355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30356 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30363 \begin_inset Index idx
30366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30376 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30383 \begin_layout Standard
30384 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30385 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30386 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30387 uses in the background.
30388 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30389 is based on commands, you can
30390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30398 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30399 any time if you know the right commands.
30400 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30401 is the end of the day.
30402 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30403 all caption labels bold.
30404 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30406 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30410 \begin_layout Standard
30411 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30413 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30415 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30418 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30427 \begin_layout Standard
30428 As result you find that the package
30433 \begin_inset Index idx
30436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30438 -packages ! caption
30444 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30446 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30449 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30453 \begin_inset space ~
30461 \begin_layout Standard
30466 usepackage[options]{package name}
30469 \begin_layout Standard
30470 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30471 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30472 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30473 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30476 \begin_layout Standard
30477 In your case the package name is
30482 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30487 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30488 So you add the command
30491 \begin_layout Standard
30496 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30499 \begin_layout Standard
30500 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30505 For more commands provided by the
30509 package, have a look at its documentation,
30510 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30524 \begin_layout Standard
30525 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30527 For example if you use a
30531 class, you don't need the package
30535 , you can instead write
30538 \begin_layout Standard
30543 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30548 \begin_layout Standard
30549 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30550 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30551 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30558 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30561 \begin_layout Standard
30562 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30563 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30565 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30566 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30567 Code box as described in the previous
30571 \begin_layout Standard
30572 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30573 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30576 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30578 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30585 \begin_layout Standard
30586 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30592 \begin_layout Standard
30596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30606 \begin_inset Note Note
30609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30610 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30618 \begin_layout Left Header
30619 \begin_inset Argument 1
30622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30642 \begin_inset Note Note
30645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30646 defines the header line as described below
30654 \begin_layout Center Header
30655 \begin_inset Argument 1
30658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30667 \begin_layout Right Header
30668 \begin_inset Argument 1
30671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30692 \begin_layout Left Footer
30693 \begin_inset Argument 1
30696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30717 \begin_layout Center Footer
30718 \begin_inset Argument 1
30721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30733 \begin_inset Newline newline
30737 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30743 \begin_layout Right Footer
30744 \begin_inset Argument 1
30747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30769 \begin_layout Section
30770 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30773 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30778 \begin_inset Index idx
30781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30782 Document ! Header/Footer line
30788 \begin_inset Index idx
30791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30800 \begin_layout Standard
30801 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30805 \begin_inset space ~
30816 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30822 \begin_inset space ~
30828 As a second step add in the menu
30830 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30831 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30838 Custom Header/Footerlines
30839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30843 This module offers the following 6
30844 \begin_inset space ~
30850 \begin_layout Description
30852 \begin_inset space ~
30856 \begin_inset space ~
30860 \begin_inset space ~
30864 \begin_inset space ~
30868 \begin_inset space ~
30874 \begin_layout Description
30876 \begin_inset space ~
30880 \begin_inset space ~
30884 \begin_inset space ~
30888 \begin_inset space ~
30892 \begin_inset space ~
30898 \begin_layout Standard
30899 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30902 \begin_layout Standard
30903 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30904 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30906 \begin_inset space ~
30910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30912 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30916 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30919 \begin_layout Standard
30920 \begin_inset Float figure
30926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30929 \begin_inset Tabular
30930 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30931 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30932 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30933 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30934 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30936 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30954 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30965 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30983 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30994 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30998 The normal text on the page goes here.
30999 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31001 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31002 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31007 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31016 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31027 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31045 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31056 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31074 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31092 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31097 name "fig:Page-layout"
31101 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31114 \begin_layout Standard
31115 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31123 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31127 \begin_inset space ~
31132 is set to “Default”.
31133 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31142 \begin_layout Subsection
31146 \begin_layout Standard
31147 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31148 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31149 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31150 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31152 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31153 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31156 \begin_layout Standard
31157 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31158 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31162 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31164 \begin_inset space ~
31172 \begin_layout Description
31175 thepage prints the current page number
31178 \begin_layout Description
31181 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31184 \begin_layout Description
31187 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31190 \begin_layout Description
31193 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31194 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31201 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31204 because it usually goes in a left header.
31207 \begin_layout Description
31210 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31211 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31213 It is normally used in the right header.
31216 \begin_layout Subsection
31217 Default header/footer
31220 \begin_layout Standard
31221 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31222 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31223 footer has the page number.
31224 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31225 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31226 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31229 \begin_inset space ~
31237 \begin_layout Subsection
31241 \begin_layout Standard
31242 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31243 Some pages are different.
31244 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31245 a new part or chapter in your book.
31246 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31247 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31248 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31251 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31252 Header and footer decoration line
31255 \begin_layout Standard
31256 By default, you get a 0.4
31257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31260 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31261 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31273 in the following way:
31276 \begin_layout Standard
31283 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31286 \begin_layout Standard
31287 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31296 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31303 \begin_layout Standard
31304 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31306 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31307 \begin_inset space ~
31311 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31320 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31321 Several header/footer lines
31324 \begin_layout Standard
31325 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31326 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31327 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31329 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31344 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31345 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31347 \begin_inset space ~
31355 \begin_layout Standard
31362 headheight}{height}
31365 \begin_layout Standard
31366 where height is a size in standard units.
31367 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31368 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31369 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31370 logfile with the menu
31372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31378 \begin_inset space ~
31383 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31388 \begin_inset Index idx
31391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31393 -packages ! fancyhdr
31399 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31400 for your header/footer.
31403 \begin_layout Subsection
31407 \begin_layout Standard
31408 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31409 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31410 This example consists of the following definition:
31413 \begin_layout Description
31415 \begin_inset space ~
31424 , empty optional argument
31427 \begin_layout Description
31429 \begin_inset space ~
31432 Header empty, empty optional argument
31435 \begin_layout Description
31437 \begin_inset space ~
31446 in the optional argument
31449 \begin_layout Description
31451 \begin_inset space ~
31460 in the optional argument
31463 \begin_layout Description
31465 \begin_inset space ~
31478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31482 \begin_inset Newline newline
31486 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31493 in the optional argument
31496 \begin_layout Description
31498 \begin_inset space ~
31507 , empty optional argument
31510 \begin_layout Description
31513 headrulewidth set to 2
31514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31520 \begin_layout Standard
31521 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31522 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31528 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31537 \begin_layout Standard
31538 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31544 \begin_layout Standard
31548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31552 pagestyle{headings}
31558 \begin_inset Note Note
31561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31562 switches back to page style with the default headings
31570 \begin_layout Section
31571 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31574 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31579 \begin_inset Index idx
31582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31589 \begin_inset Index idx
31592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31601 \begin_layout Standard
31603 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31604 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31605 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31608 \begin_layout Subsection
31612 \begin_layout Standard
31613 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31619 \begin_inset Index idx
31622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31624 -packages ! preview-latex
31629 (on some systems named simply
31634 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31636 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31642 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31644 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31652 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31653 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31654 -package are automatically
31655 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31659 \begin_layout Subsection
31663 \begin_layout Standard
31664 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31665 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31667 activate the option
31670 \begin_inset space ~
31677 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31683 \begin_inset space ~
31687 \begin_inset space ~
31690 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31697 \begin_inset space ~
31710 \begin_inset space ~
31715 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31718 \begin_layout Standard
31719 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31724 \begin_inset space ~
31732 \begin_inset space ~
31740 \begin_layout Standard
31741 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31742 and when you finish
31746 \begin_layout Standard
31747 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31755 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31756 generated by activating the option
31759 \begin_inset space ~
31765 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31773 \begin_layout Subsection
31774 Selected document parts
31777 \begin_layout Standard
31778 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31779 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31780 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31781 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31783 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31785 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31789 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31790 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31791 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31794 \begin_layout Standard
31795 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31802 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31814 is explained in section
31816 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31821 \begin_inset space ~
31831 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31832 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31833 the final rotated boxes,
31834 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31835 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31837 Here is the result:
31840 \begin_layout Standard
31841 \begin_inset Preview
31843 \begin_layout Standard
31848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31852 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31858 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31868 height_special "totalheight"
31873 backgroundcolor "none"
31876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31901 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31907 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31929 \begin_layout Standard
31930 Previewing works also for colors.
31931 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31950 is explained in section
31957 \begin_inset space ~
31970 \begin_layout Standard
31971 \begin_inset Preview
31973 \begin_layout Standard
31977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31996 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32001 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32020 \begin_layout Standard
32021 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32027 \begin_layout Standard
32028 If \SpecialChar LyX
32029 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32030 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32031 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32032 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32033 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32034 the \SpecialChar TeX
32036 If \SpecialChar LyX
32037 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32038 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32040 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32041 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32042 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32045 \begin_layout Subsection
32050 \begin_layout Standard
32051 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32052 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32055 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32057 \begin_inset space ~
32062 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32064 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32066 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32067 's main window, then only this selection
32068 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32069 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32070 the source view window.
32075 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32076 ; but note that if you have
32077 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32079 not just the one which is open at the time.
32082 \begin_layout Section
32083 Advanced Find and Replace
32084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32086 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32091 \begin_inset Index idx
32094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32101 \begin_inset Index idx
32104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32113 \begin_layout Subsection
32117 \begin_layout Standard
32118 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32119 allows for searching of complex,
32120 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32122 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32123 The key-features are:
32126 \begin_layout Itemize
32127 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32128 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32129 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32133 \begin_layout Itemize
32134 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32135 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32136 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32137 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32140 \begin_layout Itemize
32141 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32142 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32143 outside of mathematics environments
32146 \begin_layout Itemize
32147 Search may be widened to a specific
32152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32156 \begin_inset space ~
32159 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32160 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32167 \begin_layout Itemize
32168 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32169 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32174 \begin_inset space ~
32177 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32180 \begin_layout Subsection
32184 \begin_layout Standard
32185 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32187 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32200 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32203 ) or the toolbar button
32206 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32212 Advanced Find and Replace
32217 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32221 \begin_layout Standard
32227 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32231 \begin_inset space ~
32236 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32239 arg "paragraph-break"
32243 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32244 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32248 arg "paragraph-break"
32251 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32255 searches backwards.
32258 \begin_layout Standard
32262 \begin_inset space ~
32267 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32276 \begin_inset space ~
32281 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32284 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32285 Searching for mathematics
32288 \begin_layout Standard
32289 Mathematical formulas, such as
32290 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32293 or something more complex like
32294 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32297 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32302 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32303 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32304 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32305 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32315 \begin_layout Standard
32316 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32317 This is done by switching to the
32321 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32326 This way, entering in the
32333 \begin_layout Itemize
32334 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32335 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32338 \begin_layout Itemize
32339 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32340 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32343 \begin_layout Itemize
32344 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32345 of it only within section headings.
32346 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32347 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32351 \begin_layout Itemize
32352 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32353 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32360 \begin_layout Standard
32361 The entries made in the
32365 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32368 \begin_inset space ~
32374 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32378 button or alternatively press
32381 arg "paragraph-break"
32388 while the cursor is in the
32391 \begin_inset space ~
32399 \begin_layout Standard
32400 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32402 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32406 \begin_layout Itemize
32407 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32408 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32416 with its typewriter version
32417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32431 \begin_layout Itemize
32432 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32438 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32450 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32457 (you may want to enable the
32460 \begin_inset space ~
32468 \begin_inset space ~
32473 options and disable the
32481 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32489 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32490 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32494 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32497 , or occurrences of
32498 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32502 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32508 \begin_layout Subsection
32512 \begin_layout Standard
32513 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32518 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32520 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32522 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32531 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32537 This is done with the context menu
32539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32540 Insert Regular Expression
32542 while the cursor is in the
32547 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32548 expression matching rules
32552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32553 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32560 \begin_inset space ~
32563 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32564 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32570 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32571 same text in the document.
32572 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32573 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32576 \begin_layout Enumerate
32577 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32582 editor the fraction
32583 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32587 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32590 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32591 fractions with the given denominator.
32594 \begin_layout Enumerate
32595 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32607 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32612 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32613 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32614 Also, by inserting a
32615 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32618 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32619 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32622 \begin_layout Standard
32623 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32624 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32625 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32628 , and referring back to them through
32629 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32633 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32637 For example, try searching with the regexp
32638 \begin_inset Newline newline
32641 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32644 \begin_inset Newline newline
32647 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32650 \begin_layout Standard
32651 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32654 \begin_layout Standard
32655 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32663 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32664 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32665 sub-expressions is absolute.
32667 \begin_inset space ~
32671 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32674 always refers to the first occurrence of
32675 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32678 in all entered regexps.
32686 \begin_layout Section
32688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32690 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32695 \begin_inset Index idx
32698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32707 \begin_layout Standard
32709 has a built-in spell checker.
32712 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32719 key or the toolbar button
32722 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32725 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32726 beginning of the currently selected text.
32727 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32728 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32729 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32730 scrolled so that it is visible.
32731 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32732 n, if any could be found.
32733 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32737 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32738 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32741 \begin_layout Standard
32742 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32745 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32749 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32750 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32752 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32753 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32756 \begin_inset space ~
32764 arg "dialog-show character"
32767 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32769 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32772 \begin_layout Standard
32773 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32774 can be downloaded from here:
32775 \begin_inset Newline newline
32779 \begin_inset Flex URL
32782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32784 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32790 \begin_inset Newline newline
32794 \begin_inset space ~
32797 files for each language.
32798 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32799 \begin_inset space ~
32802 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32803 's installation subfolder
32811 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32813 \begin_inset Newline newline
32816 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32817 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32818 but in most cases these are
32834 is the language code.
32837 \begin_layout Subsection
32841 \begin_layout Standard
32844 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32845 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32847 \begin_inset space ~
32850 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32853 you can set the following things:
32856 \begin_layout Description
32858 \begin_inset space ~
32861 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32862 should use for spell checking.
32863 Depending on your platform,
32877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32878 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32879 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32894 \begin_inset space ~
32897 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32900 \begin_layout Description
32902 \begin_inset space ~
32905 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32906 will always use the given language
32907 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32910 \begin_layout Description
32912 \begin_inset space ~
32915 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32921 \begin_inset space \space{}
32925 This should normally not be needed.
32928 \begin_layout Description
32930 \begin_inset space ~
32934 \begin_inset space ~
32937 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32949 \begin_layout Description
32951 \begin_inset space ~
32954 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32955 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32956 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32957 appear in a context menu.
32958 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32962 \begin_layout Description
32964 \begin_inset space ~
32968 \begin_inset space ~
32972 \begin_inset space ~
32975 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32979 \begin_layout Section
32981 \begin_inset Index idx
32984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32991 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32993 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33000 \begin_layout Standard
33002 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33003 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33013 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33015 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33024 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33026 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33027 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33028 which are available for many languages.
33031 \begin_layout Standard
33032 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33033 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33037 \begin_layout Subsection
33038 Setting up the thesaurus
33041 \begin_layout Standard
33050 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33054 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33059 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33065 \begin_inset space ~
33073 For instance, the US English files are named:
33076 \begin_layout Itemize
33080 \begin_layout Itemize
33084 \begin_layout Standard
33093 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33094 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33097 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33098 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33099 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33101 \begin_inset space ~
33106 ) to the path where they are installed.
33110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33111 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33112 ies, typical locations are
33118 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33122 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33126 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33129 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33135 LibreOffice-<Version>
33142 On the Mac, the default location is
33144 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33145 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33146 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33147 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33148 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33149 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33157 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33158 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33159 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33163 \begin_layout Standard
33164 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33165 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33169 \begin_layout Itemize
33170 \begin_inset Flex URL
33173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33175 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33183 \begin_layout Standard
33184 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33185 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33187 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33188 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33189 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33191 \begin_inset space ~
33196 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33198 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33199 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33203 \begin_layout Standard
33204 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33206 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33209 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33215 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33218 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33219 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33227 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33228 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33229 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33231 \begin_inset space ~
33236 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33239 \begin_layout Subsection
33240 Using the thesaurus
33243 \begin_layout Standard
33244 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33246 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33249 or the toolbar button
33252 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33255 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33257 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33259 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33260 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33261 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33270 ), related terms (such as
33273 \begin_inset space ~
33282 ), compounds (such as
33285 \begin_inset space ~
33294 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33303 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33306 \begin_layout Standard
33307 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33308 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33312 \begin_layout Standard
33313 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33314 the dictionary, such as the above
33318 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33323 \begin_inset space \space{}
33326 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33327 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33328 For example, looking up the word form
33332 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33337 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33342 \begin_inset space \space{}
33353 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33354 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33355 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33358 \begin_layout Section
33360 \begin_inset Index idx
33363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33370 \begin_inset Index idx
33373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33374 Document ! Change Tracking
33380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33382 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33389 \begin_layout Standard
33390 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33391 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33392 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33393 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33395 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33397 \begin_inset space ~
33400 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33402 \begin_inset space ~
33410 \begin_layout Standard
33411 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33425 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33426 You can change the color in
33428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33429 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33431 \begin_inset space ~
33435 \begin_inset space ~
33440 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33446 \begin_inset Index idx
33449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33450 Color ! Change tracking
33455 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33456 's status bar when the
33457 cursor is in changed text.
33458 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33461 arg "changes-merge"
33467 \begin_layout Standard
33468 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33470 \begin_inset Index idx
33473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33482 \begin_layout Standard
33483 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33489 \begin_layout Standard
33490 \begin_inset Graphics
33491 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33499 \begin_layout Standard
33500 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33506 \begin_layout Standard
33507 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33510 \begin_layout Standard
33511 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33517 \begin_layout Standard
33518 \begin_inset Tabular
33519 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33520 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33521 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33522 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33523 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33532 arg "changes-track"
33540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33546 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33548 \begin_inset space ~
33551 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33553 \begin_inset space ~
33562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33571 arg "changes-output"
33579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33587 \begin_inset space ~
33590 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33592 \begin_inset space ~
33596 \begin_inset space ~
33600 \begin_inset space ~
33609 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33630 Jumps to the next change
33636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33645 arg "change-accept"
33653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33659 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33661 \begin_inset space ~
33664 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33666 \begin_inset space ~
33675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33684 arg "change-reject"
33692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33698 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33700 \begin_inset space ~
33703 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33705 \begin_inset space ~
33714 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33723 arg "changes-merge"
33731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33739 \begin_inset space ~
33742 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33744 \begin_inset space ~
33753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33762 arg "all-changes-accept"
33770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33776 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33778 \begin_inset space ~
33781 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33783 \begin_inset space ~
33787 \begin_inset space ~
33796 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33805 arg "all-changes-reject"
33813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33819 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33821 \begin_inset space ~
33824 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33826 \begin_inset space ~
33830 \begin_inset space ~
33839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33863 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33865 \begin_inset space ~
33874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33897 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33899 \begin_inset space ~
33915 \begin_layout Standard
33916 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33922 \begin_layout Standard
33923 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33943 \begin_layout Standard
33944 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33945 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33946 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33947 the next change after the current cursor position.
33948 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33949 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33950 step to the next change.
33951 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33954 \begin_layout Standard
33955 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33956 to describe a change.
33959 \begin_layout Standard
33960 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33966 \begin_inset Index idx
33969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33971 -packages ! dvipost
33977 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33979 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33985 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33989 \begin_layout Section
33990 Comparison of Documents
33991 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33993 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33998 \begin_inset Index idx
34001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34002 Comparison of documents
34010 \begin_layout Standard
34011 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34014 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34018 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34019 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34021 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34023 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34027 \begin_inset space ~
34031 \begin_inset space ~
34035 \begin_inset space ~
34044 \begin_inset space ~
34048 \begin_inset space ~
34052 \begin_inset space ~
34056 \begin_inset space ~
34060 \begin_inset space ~
34064 \begin_inset space ~
34069 enables the change tracking option
34072 \begin_inset space ~
34076 \begin_inset space ~
34080 \begin_inset space ~
34085 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34088 \begin_layout Section
34089 International Support
34090 \begin_inset Index idx
34093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34094 International support
34102 \begin_layout Standard
34103 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34104 with any language you want.
34105 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34106 up \SpecialChar LyX
34108 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34110 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34117 \begin_layout Standard
34118 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34119 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34120 \begin_inset space ~
34124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34126 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34133 \begin_layout Subsection
34135 \begin_inset Index idx
34138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34145 \begin_inset Index idx
34148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34149 Document ! Settings
34155 \begin_inset Index idx
34158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34159 Document ! Language
34167 \begin_layout Standard
34170 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34171 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34174 dialog lets you set
34176 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34181 \begin_layout Standard
34186 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34191 \begin_inset space ~
34196 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34197 For details about the different encoding options see section
34198 \begin_inset space ~
34202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34204 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34211 \begin_layout Subsection
34212 Keyboard mapping configuration
34213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34215 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34222 \begin_layout Standard
34223 If you have for example a U.
34224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34227 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34228 can use an alternate keymap.
34229 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34234 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34235 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34236 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34239 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34240 \begin_inset space ~
34244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34246 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34251 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34252 which one you want to use.
34255 \begin_layout Standard
34256 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34257 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34258 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34262 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34263 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34264 one to support the characters you want.
34265 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34272 \begin_layout Chapter
34275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34277 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34284 \begin_layout Standard
34285 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34286 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34287 topic inside the user's guide.
34290 \begin_layout Section
34292 \begin_inset Index idx
34295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34304 \begin_layout Standard
34309 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34312 \begin_layout Subsection
34316 \begin_layout Standard
34317 Creates a new document.
34320 \begin_layout Subsection
34324 \begin_layout Standard
34325 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34326 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34327 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34330 \begin_layout Subsection
34334 \begin_layout Standard
34338 \begin_layout Subsection
34342 \begin_layout Standard
34343 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34344 Click there on a file to open it.
34347 \begin_layout Subsection
34351 \begin_layout Standard
34352 Closes the current document.
34355 \begin_layout Subsection
34359 \begin_layout Standard
34360 Closes all opened documents.
34363 \begin_layout Subsection
34367 \begin_layout Standard
34368 Saves the actual document.
34371 \begin_layout Subsection
34375 \begin_layout Standard
34376 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34379 \begin_layout Subsection
34383 \begin_layout Standard
34384 Saves all opened documents.
34387 \begin_layout Subsection
34391 \begin_layout Standard
34392 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34395 \begin_layout Subsection
34399 \begin_layout Standard
34400 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34401 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34402 It is described in the section
34404 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34409 Additional Features
34414 \begin_layout Subsection
34418 \begin_layout Standard
34419 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34420 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34422 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34423 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34427 \begin_layout Standard
34428 When using the menu entry
34431 \begin_inset space ~
34436 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34440 \begin_inset space ~
34444 \begin_inset space ~
34448 \begin_inset space ~
34453 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34454 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34457 \begin_layout Subsection
34459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34461 name "subsec:Export"
34468 \begin_layout Standard
34469 You can export your document to various file formats.
34470 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34472 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34473 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34474 during its configuration.
34477 \begin_layout Standard
34478 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34480 \begin_inset space ~
34484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34486 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34493 \begin_layout Description
34499 \begin_inset space ~
34502 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34504 \begin_inset space ~
34507 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34508 \begin_inset Newline newline
34511 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34512 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34516 \begin_layout Description
34517 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34523 \begin_layout Description
34525 \begin_inset space ~
34528 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34534 \begin_layout Description
34535 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34536 's native DVI-format.
34537 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34538 files paths or file names in your document.
34540 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34547 \begin_layout Description
34548 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34549 in files paths or file names
34552 \begin_layout Description
34554 \begin_inset space ~
34561 ) DVI-format using the program
34563 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34566 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34578 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34586 \begin_layout Description
34588 \begin_inset space ~
34591 (cropped) the same as
34595 but with cropped page margins.
34598 \begin_layout Description
34600 \begin_inset space ~
34603 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34607 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34612 \begin_layout Description
34616 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34624 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34632 \begin_layout Description
34634 \begin_inset space ~
34638 \begin_inset space ~
34641 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34645 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34653 \begin_layout Description
34657 \begin_inset space ~
34666 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34667 source that is compilable with the program
34669 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34673 \begin_layout Description
34677 \begin_inset space ~
34682 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34683 source, additionally all images used in the document
34684 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34688 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34691 \begin_layout Description
34695 \begin_inset space ~
34700 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34701 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34702 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34710 \begin_layout Description
34714 \begin_inset space ~
34723 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34724 source that is compilable with the program
34730 \begin_layout Description
34732 \begin_inset space ~
34736 \begin_inset space ~
34743 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34744 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34750 \begin_layout Description
34752 \begin_inset space ~
34755 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34756 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34762 \begin_inset space \space{}
34767 \begin_inset space ~
34771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34786 represent the version number)
34789 \begin_layout Description
34791 \begin_inset space ~
34795 \begin_inset space ~
34798 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34799 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34800 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34804 \begin_layout Description
34805 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34806 's internal XHTML engine
34809 \begin_layout Description
34811 \begin_inset space ~
34815 \begin_inset space ~
34819 \begin_inset space ~
34823 \begin_inset space ~
34826 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
34831 For the conversion the program
34840 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34843 \begin_layout Description
34844 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34849 \begin_layout Description
34851 \begin_inset space ~
34854 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
34856 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34859 For the conversion the program
34868 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34871 \begin_layout Description
34873 \begin_inset space ~
34876 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
34877 For the conversion the program
34886 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34889 \begin_layout Description
34891 \begin_inset space ~
34894 (cropped) the same as
34897 \begin_inset space ~
34902 but with cropped page margins
34905 \begin_layout Description
34909 \begin_inset space ~
34914 PDF-format using the program
34918 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34921 \begin_layout Description
34925 \begin_inset space ~
34929 \begin_inset space ~
34937 \begin_inset space ~
34942 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34947 \begin_inset space \space{}
34950 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34954 \begin_layout Description
34958 \begin_inset space ~
34963 PDF-format using the program
34965 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34968 , produces PDF-files directly
34971 \begin_layout Description
34975 \begin_inset space ~
34980 PDF-format using the program
34984 , produces PDF-files directly
34987 \begin_layout Description
34991 \begin_inset space ~
34996 PDF-format using the program
35000 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35003 \begin_layout Description
35007 \begin_inset space ~
35012 PDF-format using the program
35017 , produces PDF-files directly
35020 \begin_layout Description
35024 \begin_inset space ~
35032 \begin_layout Description
35036 \begin_inset space ~
35040 \begin_inset space ~
35045 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35046 and then exported as text using the program
35051 \begin_layout Description
35056 PostScript format using the program
35061 \begin_layout Description
35062 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35063 source and also code in the statistical programming
35077 it is possible to use
35081 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35085 \begin_layout Standard
35086 If one of the menu entries
35093 \begin_inset space ~
35102 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35104 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35106 \begin_inset space ~
35110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35112 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35117 \begin_inset Index idx
35120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35121 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35130 \begin_layout Subsection
35134 \begin_layout Standard
35135 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35136 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35139 \begin_inset space ~
35143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35145 reference "sec:Paths"
35150 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35159 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35160 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35161 's preferences as described in section
35162 \begin_inset space ~
35166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35168 reference "subsec:Converters"
35175 \begin_layout Subsection
35176 New and Close Window
35179 \begin_layout Standard
35180 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35184 \begin_layout Subsection
35188 \begin_layout Standard
35189 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35192 \begin_layout Section
35194 \begin_inset Index idx
35197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35206 \begin_layout Subsection
35210 \begin_layout Standard
35211 Described in section
35212 \begin_inset space ~
35216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35218 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35225 \begin_layout Subsection
35226 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35229 \begin_layout Standard
35230 Described in section
35231 \begin_inset space ~
35235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35237 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35244 \begin_layout Subsection
35248 \begin_layout Standard
35249 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35250 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35253 \begin_layout Subsection
35257 \begin_layout Standard
35258 Selects the whole document.
35261 \begin_layout Subsection
35262 Find & Replace (Quick)
35265 \begin_layout Standard
35266 Described in section
35267 \begin_inset space ~
35271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35273 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35280 \begin_layout Subsection
35281 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35284 \begin_layout Standard
35285 Described in section
35286 \begin_inset space ~
35290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35292 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35299 \begin_layout Subsection
35300 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35303 \begin_layout Standard
35304 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35308 \begin_layout Subsection
35312 \begin_layout Standard
35313 Described in section
35314 \begin_inset space ~
35318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35320 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35327 \begin_layout Subsection
35329 \begin_inset Index idx
35332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35333 Paragraph ! Settings
35341 \begin_layout Standard
35342 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35343 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35347 \begin_layout Standard
35348 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35349 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35355 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35356 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35358 \begin_inset space ~
35366 \begin_layout Subsection
35370 \begin_layout Standard
35371 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35372 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35373 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35377 \begin_layout Standard
35378 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35380 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35381 The properties of tables are described in section
35382 \begin_inset space ~
35386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35388 reference "sec:Tables"
35392 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35393 \begin_inset space ~
35397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35399 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35406 \begin_layout Subsection
35407 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35410 \begin_layout Standard
35411 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35413 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35414 \begin_inset space ~
35418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35420 reference "sec:Nesting"
35425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35427 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35434 \begin_layout Subsection
35437 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35440 \begin_layout Standard
35441 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35442 nts of the same type.
35444 \begin_inset space ~
35448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35450 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35454 for an explanation.
35457 \begin_layout Section
35459 \begin_inset Index idx
35462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35471 \begin_layout Standard
35472 At the bottom of the
35476 menu the opened documents are listed.
35479 \begin_layout Subsection
35480 Open/Close all Insets
35483 \begin_layout Standard
35484 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35487 \begin_layout Subsection
35488 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35491 \begin_layout Standard
35492 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35495 \begin_layout Standard
35496 Math macros are described in the
35503 \begin_layout Subsection
35507 \begin_layout Standard
35508 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35509 \begin_inset space ~
35513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35515 reference "sec:Navigating"
35520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35522 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35529 \begin_layout Subsection
35533 \begin_layout Standard
35534 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35536 \begin_inset space ~
35540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35542 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35549 \begin_layout Subsection
35553 \begin_layout Standard
35554 Opens a window showing console messages.
35555 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35560 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35561 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35562 is processing the document.
35565 \begin_layout Subsection
35567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35569 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35574 \begin_inset Index idx
35577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35586 \begin_layout Standard
35587 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35588 All toolbars and the
35591 \begin_inset space ~
35596 can be turned on and off.
35601 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35613 \begin_inset space ~
35625 \begin_inset space ~
35630 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35634 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35641 \begin_layout Standard
35646 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35650 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35651 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35652 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35653 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35654 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35657 \begin_layout Standard
35659 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35660 \begin_inset space ~
35664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35666 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35673 \begin_layout Subsection
35677 \begin_layout Standard
35681 \begin_inset space ~
35685 \begin_inset space ~
35689 \begin_inset space ~
35693 \begin_inset space ~
35697 \begin_inset space ~
35701 \begin_inset space ~
35706 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35707 's main window vertically while
35710 \begin_inset space ~
35714 \begin_inset space ~
35718 \begin_inset space ~
35722 \begin_inset space ~
35726 \begin_inset space ~
35730 \begin_inset space ~
35735 will split it horizontally.
35736 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35737 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35738 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35739 three or more documents at the same time.
35740 To close a split view, use the menu
35743 \begin_inset space ~
35747 \begin_inset space ~
35755 \begin_layout Subsection
35759 \begin_layout Standard
35760 Closes a split view.
35763 \begin_layout Subsection
35767 \begin_layout Standard
35768 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35769 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35770 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35771 's main window fullscreen.
35772 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35773 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35776 \begin_layout Section
35778 \begin_inset Index idx
35781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35790 \begin_layout Subsection
35794 \begin_layout Standard
35795 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35796 \begin_inset space ~
35800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35802 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35813 \begin_layout Subsection
35815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35817 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35824 \begin_layout Standard
35825 Here you can insert the following characters:
35828 \begin_layout Description
35833 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35836 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35837 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35838 -packages you have installed.
35839 You can get a complete display by checking
35842 \begin_inset space ~
35848 \begin_inset Newline newline
35852 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35860 Not all characters will be visible in the
35864 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35872 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35876 ) can display every character.
35884 \begin_layout Description
35885 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35889 \begin_layout Description
35891 \begin_inset space ~
35895 \begin_inset space ~
35898 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35899 \begin_inset space ~
35903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35905 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35912 \begin_layout Description
35914 \begin_inset space ~
35917 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35920 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35921 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35927 \begin_layout Description
35929 \begin_inset space ~
35932 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35935 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35936 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35942 \begin_layout Description
35944 \begin_inset space ~
35947 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35951 \begin_layout Description
35953 \begin_inset space ~
35956 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35960 \begin_layout Description
35962 \begin_inset space ~
35965 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35971 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35977 \begin_layout Description
35979 \begin_inset space ~
35982 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35986 \begin_layout Description
35988 \begin_inset space ~
35992 \begin_inset Index idx
35995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36002 \begin_inset Index idx
36005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36006 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36011 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36012 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36014 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36020 \begin_inset Index idx
36023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36031 \begin_inset Newline newline
36034 More information about this feature can be found in the
36040 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36046 \begin_layout Description
36047 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36049 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36050 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36054 \begin_layout Subsection
36058 \begin_layout Standard
36059 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36062 \begin_layout Description
36063 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36064 \begin_inset script superscript
36066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36075 \begin_layout Description
36076 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36077 \begin_inset script subscript
36079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36088 \begin_layout Description
36090 \begin_inset space ~
36093 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36094 \begin_inset space ~
36098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36100 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36107 \begin_layout Description
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36112 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36113 \begin_inset space ~
36117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36119 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36126 \begin_layout Description
36128 \begin_inset space ~
36131 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36132 \begin_inset space ~
36136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36138 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36145 \begin_layout Description
36147 \begin_inset space ~
36150 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36156 \begin_inset space \space{}
36159 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36160 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36169 To insert a fraction use the command
36174 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36178 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36187 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36194 \begin_layout Description
36196 \begin_inset space ~
36199 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36200 \begin_inset space ~
36204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36206 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36213 \begin_layout Description
36215 \begin_inset space ~
36218 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36219 \begin_inset space ~
36223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36225 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36232 \begin_layout Description
36234 \begin_inset space ~
36237 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36238 \begin_inset space ~
36242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36244 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36251 \begin_layout Description
36252 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36253 \begin_inset space ~
36257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36259 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36266 \begin_layout Description
36268 \begin_inset space ~
36271 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36272 \begin_inset space ~
36276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36278 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36285 \begin_layout Description
36287 \begin_inset space ~
36290 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36291 \begin_inset space ~
36295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36297 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36304 \begin_layout Description
36306 \begin_inset space ~
36310 \begin_inset space ~
36313 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36314 \begin_inset space ~
36318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36320 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36327 \begin_layout Description
36329 \begin_inset space ~
36332 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36333 as described in section
36334 \begin_inset space ~
36338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36340 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36347 \begin_layout Description
36349 \begin_inset space ~
36352 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36353 \begin_inset space ~
36357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36359 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36366 \begin_layout Description
36368 \begin_inset space ~
36371 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36372 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36374 \begin_inset space ~
36378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36380 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36387 \begin_layout Description
36389 \begin_inset space ~
36392 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36393 \begin_inset space ~
36397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36399 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36406 \begin_layout Description
36408 \begin_inset space ~
36412 \begin_inset space ~
36415 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36422 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36429 \begin_layout Subsection
36433 \begin_layout Standard
36434 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36438 \begin_inset space ~
36459 are described in section
36460 \begin_inset space ~
36464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36466 reference "sec:toc"
36475 is described in section
36476 \begin_inset space ~
36480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36482 reference "sec:Index"
36490 is described in section
36491 \begin_inset space ~
36495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36497 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36503 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36506 is described in section
36507 \begin_inset space ~
36511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36513 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36520 \begin_layout Subsection
36524 \begin_layout Standard
36525 To insert floats, as described in section
36526 \begin_inset space ~
36530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36532 reference "sec:Floats"
36536 and in detail the chapter
36543 \begin_inset space ~
36551 \begin_layout Subsection
36555 \begin_layout Standard
36556 To insert notes, described in section
36557 \begin_inset space ~
36561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36563 reference "sec:Notes"
36570 \begin_layout Subsection
36574 \begin_layout Standard
36575 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36577 Branches are described in section
36578 \begin_inset space ~
36582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36584 reference "sec:Branches"
36591 \begin_layout Subsection
36595 \begin_layout Standard
36596 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36597 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36599 An example is the document class
36600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36607 with three custom insets.
36610 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36614 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36620 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36623 \begin_layout Subsection
36625 \begin_inset Index idx
36628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36637 \begin_layout Standard
36638 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36640 For more information see chapter
36642 External Document Parts
36645 \begin_inset space ~
36651 \begin_layout Subsection
36653 \begin_inset Index idx
36656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36665 \begin_layout Standard
36666 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36667 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36674 \begin_inset space ~
36682 \begin_layout Subsection
36686 \begin_layout Standard
36691 dialog as described in section
36692 \begin_inset space ~
36696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36698 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36705 \begin_layout Subsection
36709 \begin_layout Standard
36714 as described in section
36715 \begin_inset space ~
36719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36721 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36728 \begin_layout Subsection
36732 \begin_layout Standard
36737 as described in section
36738 \begin_inset space ~
36742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36744 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36751 \begin_layout Subsection
36753 \begin_inset Index idx
36756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36763 \begin_inset Index idx
36766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36767 Longtables ! Caption
36775 \begin_layout Standard
36776 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36777 Floats are described in section
36778 \begin_inset space ~
36782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36784 reference "sec:Floats"
36788 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36795 \begin_inset space ~
36803 \begin_layout Subsection
36807 \begin_layout Standard
36808 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36809 \begin_inset space ~
36813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36815 reference "sec:Index"
36822 \begin_layout Subsection
36826 \begin_layout Standard
36827 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36828 \begin_inset space ~
36832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36834 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36841 \begin_layout Subsection
36845 \begin_layout Standard
36846 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36847 Tables are described in section
36848 \begin_inset space ~
36852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36854 reference "sec:Tables"
36858 and in detail in the chapter
36865 \begin_inset space ~
36873 \begin_layout Subsection
36877 \begin_layout Standard
36883 Graphics are described in section
36884 \begin_inset space ~
36888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36890 reference "sec:Graphics"
36897 \begin_layout Subsection
36901 \begin_layout Standard
36902 Inserts a URL as described in section
36903 \begin_inset space ~
36907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36909 reference "subsec:URLs"
36916 \begin_layout Subsection
36920 \begin_layout Standard
36921 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36922 \begin_inset space ~
36926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36928 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36935 \begin_layout Subsection
36939 \begin_layout Standard
36940 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36941 \begin_inset space ~
36945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36947 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36954 \begin_layout Subsection
36958 \begin_layout Standard
36959 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36960 \begin_inset space ~
36964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36966 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36973 \begin_layout Subsection
36977 \begin_layout Standard
36978 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36979 title or caption of a float.
36980 Inserts a short title as described in section
36981 \begin_inset space ~
36985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36987 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36994 \begin_layout Subsection
36999 \begin_layout Standard
37000 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37001 Code box as described in section
37002 \begin_inset space ~
37006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37008 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37015 \begin_layout Subsection
37017 \begin_inset Index idx
37020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37029 \begin_layout Standard
37030 Inserts a program listings box.
37031 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37033 Program Code Listings
37038 \begin_inset space ~
37046 \begin_layout Subsection
37050 \begin_layout Standard
37051 Inserts the actual date.
37052 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37056 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37064 \begin_inset space ~
37072 \begin_layout Subsection
37076 \begin_layout Standard
37077 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37078 \begin_inset space ~
37082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37084 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37091 \begin_layout Section
37093 \begin_inset Index idx
37096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37105 \begin_layout Standard
37106 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37107 \begin_inset space ~
37110 of the current document.
37111 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37114 \begin_layout Subsection
37118 \begin_layout Standard
37119 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37120 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37121 to jump, for example, between section
37122 \begin_inset space ~
37126 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37127 \begin_inset space ~
37130 2.5 and use the submenu
37133 \begin_inset space ~
37137 \begin_inset space ~
37144 \begin_inset space ~
37150 \begin_inset space ~
37154 \begin_inset space ~
37160 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37164 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37170 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37173 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37176 \begin_layout Standard
37177 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37181 \begin_inset space ~
37186 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37189 \begin_inset space ~
37194 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37197 \begin_layout Subsection
37198 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37201 \begin_layout Standard
37202 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37206 \begin_layout Subsection
37210 \begin_layout Standard
37211 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37212 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37213 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37217 \begin_inset space ~
37221 \begin_inset space ~
37229 \begin_layout Subsection
37233 \begin_layout Standard
37234 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37237 The \SpecialChar LyX
37238 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37240 \begin_inset space ~
37248 \begin_inset space ~
37253 manual for a detailed description.
37256 \begin_layout Section
37258 \begin_inset Index idx
37261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37270 \begin_layout Subsection
37274 \begin_layout Standard
37275 Change Tracking is described in section
37276 \begin_inset space ~
37280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37282 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37289 \begin_layout Subsection
37297 \begin_layout Standard
37298 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37299 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37300 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37302 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37303 to the clipboard or update the view.
37304 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37308 \begin_layout Subsection
37309 Start Appendix Here
37312 \begin_layout Standard
37313 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37314 as described in section
37315 \begin_inset space ~
37319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37321 reference "sec:Appendices"
37328 \begin_layout Subsection
37330 \begin_inset space ~
37336 \begin_layout Standard
37337 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37338 default output format for the document (menu
37340 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37341 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37342 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37344 \begin_inset space ~
37348 \begin_inset space ~
37354 \begin_inset space ~
37358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37360 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37364 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37367 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37368 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37370 \begin_inset space ~
37373 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37378 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37380 \begin_inset space ~
37384 \begin_inset space ~
37390 \begin_inset space ~
37394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37396 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37400 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37401 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37403 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37404 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37406 \begin_inset space ~
37409 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37414 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37418 \begin_inset space ~
37422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37424 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37429 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37430 when it is first configured.
37431 The default output format is
37434 \begin_inset space ~
37442 \begin_layout Subsection
37443 View (Other Formats)
37446 \begin_layout Standard
37447 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37448 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37449 actual document with an external program.
37450 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37451 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37452 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37454 All possible formats are listed in section
37455 \begin_inset space ~
37459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37461 reference "subsec:Export"
37466 You should at least see the menu entry
37471 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37473 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37475 \begin_inset space ~
37479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37481 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37486 \begin_inset Index idx
37489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37490 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37499 \begin_layout Standard
37500 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37501 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37503 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37504 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37506 \begin_inset space ~
37509 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37511 \begin_inset space ~
37514 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37518 \begin_inset space ~
37522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37524 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37529 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37530 when it is first configured.
37533 \begin_layout Subsection
37535 \begin_inset space ~
37541 \begin_layout Standard
37542 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37543 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37546 \begin_layout Subsection
37547 Update (Other Formats)
37550 \begin_layout Standard
37551 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37552 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37555 \begin_layout Subsection
37556 View Master Document
37559 \begin_layout Standard
37560 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37576 \begin_inset space ~
37581 manual for more information on this topic).
37582 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37583 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37587 \begin_inset space ~
37591 \begin_inset space ~
37596 generates the output of the whole book, while
37600 will just output the chapter alone.
37603 \begin_layout Standard
37604 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37605 in the document settings (menu
37607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37608 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37609 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37611 \begin_inset space ~
37615 \begin_inset space ~
37621 \begin_inset space ~
37625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37627 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37631 ) or in the preferences (menu
37633 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37634 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37636 \begin_inset space ~
37639 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37641 \begin_inset space ~
37644 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37646 \begin_inset space ~
37650 \begin_inset space ~
37656 \begin_inset space ~
37660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37662 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37669 \begin_layout Subsection
37670 Update Master Document
37673 \begin_layout Standard
37674 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37690 \begin_inset space ~
37695 manual for more information on this topic).
37696 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37697 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37700 \begin_layout Standard
37701 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37702 in the document settings (menu
37704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37705 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37706 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37708 \begin_inset space ~
37712 \begin_inset space ~
37718 \begin_inset space ~
37722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37724 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37728 ) or in the preferences (menu
37730 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37731 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37733 \begin_inset space ~
37736 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37738 \begin_inset space ~
37741 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37743 \begin_inset space ~
37747 \begin_inset space ~
37753 \begin_inset space ~
37757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37759 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37766 \begin_layout Subsection
37768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37770 name "subsec:Compressed"
37777 \begin_layout Standard
37778 Un/compresses the current document.
37779 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37780 compression (see the
37782 Additional Features
37784 manual for details).
37787 \begin_layout Subsection
37791 \begin_layout Standard
37792 The document settings are described in appendix
37793 \begin_inset space ~
37797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37799 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37806 \begin_layout Section
37808 \begin_inset Index idx
37811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37820 \begin_layout Subsection
37824 \begin_layout Standard
37825 Spell checking is explained in section
37826 \begin_inset space ~
37830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37832 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37839 \begin_layout Subsection
37843 \begin_layout Standard
37844 The thesaurus is described in section
37845 \begin_inset space ~
37849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37851 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37858 \begin_layout Subsection
37860 \begin_inset Index idx
37863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37870 \begin_inset Index idx
37873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37882 \begin_layout Standard
37883 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37884 the highlighted document part.
37887 \begin_layout Subsection
37893 \begin_inset Index idx
37896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37897 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37906 \begin_layout Standard
37907 Generates with the help of the program
37909 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37912 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37913 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37914 This feature is not available on Windows.
37917 \begin_layout Subsection
37923 \begin_inset Index idx
37926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37936 \begin_layout Standard
37937 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37942 \begin_inset space ~
37947 to see the full filename paths.
37950 \begin_layout Subsection
37952 \begin_inset Index idx
37955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37964 \begin_layout Standard
37965 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37966 files as described in section
37967 \begin_inset space ~
37971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37973 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37980 \begin_layout Subsection
37982 \begin_inset Index idx
37985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37998 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38016 \begin_inset Index idx
38019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38020 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38029 \begin_layout Standard
38030 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38031 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38032 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38033 -packages and programs it needs; see
38035 \begin_inset space ~
38039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38041 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38048 \begin_layout Subsection
38052 \begin_layout Standard
38057 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38058 \begin_inset space ~
38062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38064 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38071 \begin_layout Section
38073 \begin_inset Index idx
38076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38085 \begin_layout Standard
38086 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38087 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38089 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38093 \begin_layout Standard
38097 \begin_inset space ~
38102 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38103 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38104 packages and classes found
38105 by \SpecialChar LyX
38107 \begin_inset space ~
38111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38113 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38120 \begin_layout Standard
38124 \begin_inset space ~
38129 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38134 \begin_layout Section
38136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38138 name "sec:Toolbars"
38145 \begin_layout Standard
38146 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38147 \begin_inset space ~
38151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38153 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38160 \begin_layout Standard
38161 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38162 This is described in the
38164 Additional Features
38169 \begin_layout Subsection
38171 \begin_inset Index idx
38174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38183 \begin_layout Standard
38184 \begin_inset Graphics
38185 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38193 \begin_layout Standard
38194 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38200 \begin_layout Standard
38201 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38218 \begin_inset Note Note
38221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38222 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38227 manual for more information.
38235 \begin_layout Standard
38236 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38242 \begin_layout Standard
38243 \begin_inset Tabular
38244 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38245 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38246 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38247 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38253 \begin_inset Graphics
38254 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38268 pull-down box for the environments
38281 \begin_layout Standard
38282 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38288 \begin_layout Standard
38290 \begin_inset Tabular
38291 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38292 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38293 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38294 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38295 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38318 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38325 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38348 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38378 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38385 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38394 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38408 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38415 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38424 arg "spelling-continuously"
38432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38436 Spellcheck continuously
38442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38465 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38472 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38495 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38502 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38525 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38555 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38585 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38592 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38601 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38615 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38641 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38655 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38683 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38697 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38698 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38705 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38726 Emphasize text, function of the
38728 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38730 \begin_inset space ~
38733 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38763 Set text to noun style, function of the
38765 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38770 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38779 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38788 arg "textstyle-apply"
38796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38800 Format text using the current settings in the
38802 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38804 \begin_inset space ~
38807 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38839 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38840 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38842 \begin_inset space ~
38851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38860 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38874 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38888 arg "tabular-insert"
38896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38902 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38909 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38918 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38930 Toggle outline window on/off,
38932 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38939 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38948 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38960 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38975 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38987 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39000 \begin_layout Subsection
39002 \begin_inset Index idx
39005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39014 \begin_layout Standard
39015 \begin_inset Graphics
39016 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39024 \begin_layout Standard
39025 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39031 \begin_layout Standard
39032 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39036 \begin_layout Standard
39037 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39043 \begin_layout Standard
39044 \begin_inset Tabular
39045 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39046 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39047 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39048 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39085 arg "layout Enumerate"
39093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39112 arg "layout Itemize"
39120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39130 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39166 arg "layout Description"
39174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39184 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39193 arg "depth-increment"
39201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39207 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39209 \begin_inset space ~
39213 \begin_inset space ~
39222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39231 arg "depth-decrement"
39239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39245 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39247 \begin_inset space ~
39251 \begin_inset space ~
39260 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39269 arg "float-insert figure"
39277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39284 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39291 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39300 arg "float-insert table"
39308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39314 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39315 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39361 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39375 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39391 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39437 \begin_inset space ~
39446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39455 arg "nomencl-insert"
39463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39471 \begin_inset space ~
39480 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39489 arg "footnote-insert"
39497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39510 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39519 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39533 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39535 \begin_inset space ~
39544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39568 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39570 \begin_inset space ~
39579 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39588 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39602 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39609 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39632 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39664 \begin_inset space ~
39673 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39682 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39696 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39697 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39704 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39713 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39728 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39730 \begin_inset space ~
39739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39748 arg "dialog-show character"
39756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39762 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39764 \begin_inset space ~
39767 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39783 arg "layout-paragraph"
39791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39797 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39799 \begin_inset space ~
39808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39817 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39831 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39845 \begin_layout Subsection
39846 View/Update Toolbar
39847 \begin_inset Index idx
39850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39851 Toolbar ! View / Update
39859 \begin_layout Standard
39860 \begin_inset Graphics
39861 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39868 \begin_layout Standard
39869 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39875 \begin_layout Standard
39876 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39880 \begin_layout Standard
39881 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39887 \begin_layout Standard
39888 \begin_inset Tabular
39889 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39890 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39891 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39892 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39893 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39916 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39923 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39932 arg "buffer-update"
39940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39953 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39962 arg "master-buffer-view"
39970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39976 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39978 \begin_inset space ~
39987 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39996 arg "master-buffer-update"
40004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40010 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40012 \begin_inset space ~
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40034 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40049 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40050 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40051 Synchronize with Output
40057 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40080 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40081 View (Other Formats)
40087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40094 arg "update-others"
40102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40109 Update (Other Formats)
40122 \begin_layout Standard
40123 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40127 \begin_layout Subsection
40131 \begin_layout Standard
40132 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40133 \begin_inset space ~
40137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40139 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40143 , the table toolbar
40144 \begin_inset Index idx
40147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40156 \begin_inset space ~
40161 manual and the math macro toolbar
40162 \begin_inset Index idx
40165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40178 \begin_layout Chapter
40179 The Document Settings
40180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40182 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40187 \begin_inset Index idx
40190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40191 Document ! Settings
40199 \begin_layout Standard
40203 \begin_inset space ~
40208 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40209 is called with the menu
40211 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40215 You can save your document settings as default with the
40217 Save as Document Defaults
40219 button in any dialog.
40220 This will create a template named
40224 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40225 when you create a new document without
40229 \begin_layout Standard
40234 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40235 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40238 \begin_layout Standard
40239 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40240 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40241 to find the one you are looking for.
40242 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40243 the submenus of the dialog.
40245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40249 \begin_inset space \space{}
40253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40260 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40261 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40262 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40265 \begin_layout Section
40269 \begin_layout Standard
40270 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40272 Document classes are described in section
40273 \begin_inset space ~
40277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40279 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40287 \begin_layout Standard
40291 \begin_inset space ~
40296 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40301 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40302 as a layout for a document class.
40303 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40305 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40314 \begin_layout Standard
40315 Some classes use special class options by default.
40316 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40320 and you can decide to use them or not.
40321 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40322 recommended you leave them untouched.
40327 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40328 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40333 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40335 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40341 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40342 \begin_inset Newline newline
40347 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40350 \begin_inset Newline newline
40353 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40354 distribution, see section
40359 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40361 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40373 \begin_layout Standard
40378 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40379 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40380 in the background if the child document
40381 is opened without its master.
40382 This way child documents are always compilable.
40383 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40390 \begin_inset space ~
40398 \begin_layout Standard
40399 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40410 \begin_inset Index idx
40413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40415 -packages ! prettyref
40421 \begin_inset Index idx
40424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40426 -packages ! refstyle
40431 for cross-references, see section
40432 \begin_inset space ~
40436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40438 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40445 \begin_layout Section
40449 \begin_layout Standard
40450 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40451 Please refer to the section
40454 \begin_inset space ~
40462 \begin_inset space ~
40467 manual for details.
40470 \begin_layout Section
40474 \begin_layout Standard
40475 Modules are explained in section
40476 \begin_inset space ~
40480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40482 reference "subsec:Modules"
40489 \begin_layout Section
40493 \begin_layout Standard
40495 \begin_inset space ~
40499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40501 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40508 \begin_layout Section
40512 \begin_layout Standard
40513 The document font settings are described in section
40514 \begin_inset space ~
40518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40520 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40527 \begin_layout Section
40531 \begin_layout Standard
40532 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40544 \begin_inset space ~
40549 and whether it should be a
40552 \begin_inset space ~
40557 can also be specified here.
40560 \begin_layout Standard
40561 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40562 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40563 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40565 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40568 \begin_layout Standard
40571 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40574 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40575 justifies the text on screen.
40576 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40580 \begin_layout Section
40584 \begin_layout Standard
40585 This dialog is described in sections
40586 \begin_inset space ~
40590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40592 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40599 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40606 \begin_layout Section
40610 \begin_layout Standard
40611 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40612 \begin_inset space ~
40616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40618 reference "subsec:Margins"
40625 \begin_layout Section
40627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40629 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40634 \begin_inset Index idx
40637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40638 Language ! Encoding
40646 \begin_layout Standard
40647 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40648 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40649 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40651 is always encoded in utf8).
40652 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40653 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40654 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40655 -command is not known for
40656 a particular character).
40659 \begin_layout Standard
40660 If you use the option
40665 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40666 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40667 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40669 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40670 exactly one encoding.
40671 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40674 \begin_layout Standard
40676 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40677 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40678 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40679 installation supports Unicode), choose
40680 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40681 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40682 is quite incomplete, so
40683 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40688 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40689 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40690 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40691 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40692 -commands is not used, because all
40693 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40694 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40695 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40696 , two new alternative engines
40697 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40699 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40701 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40704 \begin_inset space ~
40712 \begin_inset space ~
40720 \begin_inset space ~
40726 \begin_inset space ~
40730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40732 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40737 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40741 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40744 \begin_layout Standard
40748 \begin_inset space ~
40753 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40754 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40764 The possible settings are:
40767 \begin_layout Description
40768 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40770 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40771 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40775 \begin_inset space ~
40779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40781 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40788 \begin_layout Description
40789 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40790 format you will use.
40791 In many cases this will be
40796 \begin_inset Index idx
40799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40807 If the newer package
40812 \begin_inset Index idx
40815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40817 -packages ! polyglossia
40822 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40823 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40824 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40826 this package will be used instead of
40833 \begin_layout Description
40835 \begin_inset space ~
40846 would be more appropriate.
40849 \begin_layout Description
40850 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40851 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40855 (for German texts), type in
40858 \begin_inset Newline newline
40863 usepackage{ngerman}
40866 \begin_layout Description
40867 None will not use a language package.
40868 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40871 \begin_layout Standard
40872 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40875 \begin_layout Description
40877 \begin_inset space ~
40881 \begin_inset space ~
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40892 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40898 \begin_inset Index idx
40901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40903 -packages ! inputenc
40909 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40910 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40911 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40915 \begin_layout Description
40916 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40918 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40919 commands, which may result in a big
40920 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40921 -commands are needed.
40924 \begin_layout Description
40926 \begin_inset space ~
40930 \begin_inset space ~
40933 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40936 \begin_layout Description
40938 \begin_inset space ~
40942 \begin_inset space ~
40945 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40948 \begin_layout Description
40950 \begin_inset space ~
40953 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40956 \begin_layout Description
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40962 \begin_inset space ~
40965 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40966 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40969 \begin_layout Description
40971 \begin_inset space ~
40975 \begin_inset space ~
40978 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40982 \begin_layout Description
40984 \begin_inset space ~
40988 \begin_inset space ~
40991 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40992 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40995 \begin_layout Description
40997 \begin_inset space ~
41001 \begin_inset space ~
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41008 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41009 \begin_inset space ~
41015 \begin_layout Description
41017 \begin_inset space ~
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41028 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41029 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41032 \begin_layout Description
41034 \begin_inset space ~
41038 \begin_inset space ~
41041 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41042 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41043 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41044 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41045 \begin_inset space ~
41049 \begin_inset space ~
41055 \begin_layout Description
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41061 \begin_inset space ~
41064 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41065 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41066 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41068 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41073 \begin_inset space ~
41079 \begin_layout Description
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41085 \begin_inset space ~
41088 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41091 \begin_layout Description
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41097 \begin_inset space ~
41100 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41103 \begin_layout Description
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41112 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41115 \begin_layout Description
41117 \begin_inset space ~
41120 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41123 \begin_layout Description
41125 \begin_inset space ~
41128 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41131 \begin_layout Description
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41137 \begin_inset space ~
41140 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41143 \begin_layout Description
41145 \begin_inset space ~
41149 \begin_inset space ~
41155 \begin_layout Description
41157 \begin_inset space ~
41161 \begin_inset space ~
41164 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41167 \begin_layout Description
41169 \begin_inset space ~
41173 \begin_inset space ~
41179 \begin_layout Description
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41185 \begin_inset space ~
41188 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41194 \begin_inset Index idx
41197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41204 , when using this, set the document language to
41209 \begin_layout Description
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41218 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41223 , when using this, set the document language to
41226 \begin_inset space ~
41232 \begin_layout Description
41234 \begin_inset space ~
41238 \begin_inset space ~
41241 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41247 \begin_inset Index idx
41250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41252 -packages ! japanese
41257 , when using this, set the document language to
41262 \begin_layout Description
41264 \begin_inset space ~
41268 \begin_inset space ~
41271 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41276 , when using this, set the document language to
41281 \begin_layout Description
41283 \begin_inset space ~
41287 \begin_inset space ~
41290 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41295 , when using this, set the document language to
41300 \begin_layout Description
41302 \begin_inset space ~
41305 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41308 \begin_layout Description
41310 \begin_inset space ~
41314 \begin_inset space ~
41318 \begin_inset space ~
41321 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41324 \begin_layout Description
41326 \begin_inset space ~
41330 \begin_inset space ~
41334 \begin_inset space ~
41337 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41338 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41339 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41342 \begin_layout Description
41344 \begin_inset space ~
41348 \begin_inset space ~
41354 \begin_layout Description
41356 \begin_inset space ~
41360 \begin_inset space ~
41363 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41364 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41367 \begin_layout Description
41369 \begin_inset space ~
41373 \begin_inset space ~
41376 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41382 \begin_inset Index idx
41385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41392 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41395 \begin_layout Description
41397 \begin_inset space ~
41405 \begin_inset space ~
41408 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41415 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41418 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41425 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41426 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41428 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41431 \begin_layout Description
41433 \begin_inset space ~
41437 \begin_inset space ~
41440 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41446 \begin_inset Index idx
41449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41456 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41459 \begin_layout Description
41461 \begin_inset space ~
41464 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41470 \begin_inset Index idx
41473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41475 -packages ! inputenc
41481 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41485 \begin_layout Description
41487 \begin_inset space ~
41491 \begin_inset space ~
41495 \begin_inset space ~
41498 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41499 \begin_inset space ~
41505 \begin_layout Description
41507 \begin_inset space ~
41511 \begin_inset space ~
41515 \begin_inset space ~
41518 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41519 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41520 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41524 \begin_layout Description
41526 \begin_inset space ~
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41537 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41538 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41541 \begin_layout Section
41543 \begin_inset Index idx
41546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41553 \begin_inset Index idx
41556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41563 \begin_inset Index idx
41566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41567 Color ! Shaded boxes
41573 \begin_inset Index idx
41576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41577 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41585 \begin_layout Standard
41586 Here you can alter the font color for the
41590 (default: black), for
41593 \begin_inset space ~
41598 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41602 (default: white) and for
41605 \begin_inset space ~
41615 sets the color back to the default.
41618 \begin_layout Standard
41619 Clicking any button showing
41627 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41628 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41629 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41630 later more quickly.
41633 \begin_layout Standard
41634 Note, if you change the
41637 \begin_inset space ~
41642 font color and use the option
41645 \begin_inset space ~
41650 in the document settings under
41653 \begin_inset space ~
41658 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41659 \begin_inset space ~
41663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41665 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41672 \begin_layout Standard
41673 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41679 \begin_layout Standard
41683 \begin_inset space ~
41692 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41698 Code after a forced page break:
41701 \begin_layout Itemize
41702 For the page color:
41703 \begin_inset Newline newline
41710 pagecolor{color name}
41713 \begin_layout Itemize
41714 For the text color:
41715 \begin_inset Newline newline
41725 \begin_layout Standard
41726 You are restricted to one of
41762 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41769 \begin_inset space ~
41775 \begin_inset Newline newline
41778 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41779 names to refer to them:
41782 \begin_layout Itemize
41788 \begin_inset Newline newline
41793 page_backgroundcolor
41796 \begin_layout Itemize
41800 \begin_inset space ~
41806 \begin_inset Newline newline
41814 \begin_layout Itemize
41818 \begin_inset space ~
41824 \begin_inset Newline newline
41832 \begin_layout Itemize
41836 \begin_inset space ~
41842 \begin_inset Newline newline
41850 \begin_layout Standard
41851 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41854 \begin_inset space ~
41862 \begin_inset space ~
41870 \begin_layout Section
41874 \begin_layout Standard
41875 Here you can adjust the
41879 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41883 as described in section
41884 \begin_inset space ~
41888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41890 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41897 \begin_layout Section
41901 \begin_layout Standard
41902 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41908 \begin_inset Index idx
41911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41923 \begin_inset Index idx
41926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41928 -packages ! jurabib
41936 Sectioned bibliography
41938 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41944 \begin_inset Index idx
41947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41949 -packages ! bibtopic
41954 and you can select a
41958 for the generation of the bibliography.
41959 For a further description see section
41960 \begin_inset space ~
41964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41966 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41973 \begin_layout Section
41977 \begin_layout Standard
41978 Here you can define the
41982 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41984 \begin_inset space ~
41988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41990 reference "sec:Index"
41997 \begin_layout Section
42001 \begin_layout Standard
42002 The PDF properties are explained in section
42003 \begin_inset space ~
42007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42009 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42016 \begin_layout Section
42020 \begin_layout Standard
42021 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42022 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42028 \begin_inset Index idx
42031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42033 -packages ! amsmath
42043 \begin_inset Index idx
42046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42048 -packages ! amssymb
42058 \begin_inset Index idx
42061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42073 \begin_inset Index idx
42076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42088 \begin_inset Index idx
42091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42093 -packages ! mathdots
42103 \begin_inset Index idx
42106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42108 -packages ! mathtools
42118 \begin_inset Index idx
42121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42133 \begin_inset Index idx
42136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42138 -packages ! stackrel
42148 \begin_inset Index idx
42151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42153 -packages ! stmaryrd
42163 \begin_inset Index idx
42166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42168 -packages ! undertilde
42173 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42176 \begin_layout Description
42177 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42178 -errors in formulas,
42179 ensure that you have this enabled.
42182 \begin_layout Description
42183 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42184 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42185 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42189 \begin_layout Description
42190 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42193 \begin_inset space ~
42205 \begin_layout Description
42206 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42209 \begin_inset space ~
42221 \begin_layout Description
42222 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42233 \begin_layout Description
42234 mathtools is used for the math commands
42270 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42277 \begin_layout Description
42278 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42280 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42289 \begin_layout Description
42290 stackrel is used for the math command
42307 \begin_layout Description
42308 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42311 \begin_layout Description
42312 undertilde is used for the math command
42320 Accents for one Character
42329 \begin_layout Section
42333 \begin_layout Standard
42334 The float placement options are described in the section
42337 \begin_inset space ~
42345 \begin_inset space ~
42353 \begin_layout Section
42357 \begin_layout Standard
42358 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42360 Program Code Listings
42365 \begin_inset space ~
42373 \begin_layout Section
42377 \begin_layout Standard
42378 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42386 set to be used and set the
42391 The itemize environment is described in section
42392 \begin_inset space ~
42396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42398 reference "sec:Itemize"
42405 \begin_layout Standard
42406 You can furthermore specify a
42409 \begin_inset space ~
42414 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42415 command of the desired character.
42416 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42423 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42429 \begin_inset space \space{}
42433 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42443 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42444 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42447 \begin_layout Standard
42448 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42456 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42457 -packages in the preamble (menu
42460 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42461 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42464 \begin_inset space ~
42470 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42474 usepackage{textcomp}
42477 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42481 usepackage{amssymb}
42491 \begin_layout Section
42495 \begin_layout Standard
42496 Branches are described in section
42497 \begin_inset space ~
42501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42503 reference "sec:Branches"
42510 \begin_layout Section
42512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42514 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42521 \begin_layout Standard
42522 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42525 \begin_layout Description
42527 \begin_inset space ~
42531 \begin_inset space ~
42534 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42554 View Master Document
42555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42562 Update Master Document
42563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42570 menu or the toolbar.
42571 The default is set in
42573 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42574 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42576 \begin_inset space ~
42579 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42583 \begin_inset space ~
42587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42589 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42596 \begin_layout Description
42598 \begin_inset space ~
42602 \begin_inset space ~
42605 Output settings for the menu
42607 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42609 \begin_inset space ~
42615 For a detailed description see section
42617 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42622 \begin_inset space ~
42630 \begin_layout Description
42632 \begin_inset space ~
42636 \begin_inset space ~
42639 Options offers settings for the export format
42647 \begin_inset space ~
42652 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42653 \begin_inset space ~
42656 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42660 \begin_inset space ~
42665 settings are described in detail in section
42667 Math Output in XHTML
42672 \begin_inset space ~
42681 \begin_inset space ~
42685 \begin_inset space ~
42690 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42693 \begin_layout Section
42701 \begin_layout Standard
42702 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42704 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42706 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42708 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42712 \begin_layout Standard
42713 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42714 -syntax is given in section
42715 \begin_inset space ~
42719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42721 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42728 \begin_layout Chapter
42734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42736 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42741 \begin_inset Index idx
42744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42753 \begin_layout Standard
42754 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42756 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42760 It has the following submenus.
42763 \begin_layout Section
42767 \begin_layout Subsection
42771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42772 User Interface File
42773 \begin_inset Index idx
42776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42777 Customization ! of toolbars
42783 \begin_inset Index idx
42786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42787 Customization ! of menus
42795 \begin_layout Standard
42796 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42797 interface (ui) file.
42798 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42806 \begin_layout Description
42811 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42814 \begin_layout Description
42821 the menu entries in popup context menus
42824 \begin_layout Description
42829 specifies the toolbar buttons
42832 \begin_layout Standard
42833 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42834 and edit the entries.
42837 \begin_layout Standard
42838 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42850 entries must be finished with an explicit
42875 and in the case of the
42876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42888 The syntax for the entries is:
42891 \begin_layout Standard
42892 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42921 \begin_layout Standard
42923 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42926 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42927 -functions are listed in the menu
42929 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42931 \begin_inset space ~
42939 \begin_layout Standard
42940 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42946 \begin_layout Standard
42947 For example, assuming you use the menu
42949 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42952 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42956 \begin_layout Standard
42957 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42981 \begin_layout Standard
42983 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42998 to have the sixth bookmark.
43001 \begin_layout Standard
43005 \begin_inset space ~
43010 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43011 's toolbar buttons.
43012 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43013 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43016 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43027 \begin_layout Standard
43030 Enable tool tips in main work area
43032 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43040 \begin_layout Standard
43045 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43046 should display in the menu
43048 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43050 \begin_inset space ~
43058 \begin_layout Subsection
43062 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43066 \begin_layout Standard
43069 Restore window layouts and geometries
43072 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43073 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43077 \begin_layout Standard
43080 Restore cursor positions
43082 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43086 \begin_layout Standard
43089 Load opened files from last session
43091 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43095 \begin_layout Standard
43098 Clear all session information
43100 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43101 sessions (cursor positions, names
43102 of last opened documents, etc.).
43105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43109 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43114 \begin_inset Index idx
43117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43126 \begin_layout Standard
43129 Backup original documents when saving
43131 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43132 it was saved the last time.
43133 It is stored in the
43136 \begin_inset space ~
43142 \begin_inset space ~
43146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43148 reference "sec:Paths"
43152 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43155 \begin_inset space ~
43161 The backup file has the file extension
43162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43176 \begin_layout Standard
43179 Backup documents, every
43181 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43184 \begin_layout Standard
43187 Save documents compressed by default
43189 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43190 \begin_inset space ~
43194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43196 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43201 This applies to newly created documents only.
43202 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43205 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43206 Windows & work area
43209 \begin_layout Standard
43212 Open documents in tabs
43214 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43218 \begin_layout Standard
43223 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43236 reference "sec:Paths"
43240 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43247 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43248 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43249 of \SpecialChar LyX
43251 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43252 instance is created for each file.
43255 \begin_layout Standard
43258 Single close-tab button
43260 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43270 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43271 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43274 \begin_layout Standard
43275 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43283 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43284 before the change takes effect.
43292 \begin_layout Standard
43297 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43299 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43301 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43305 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43306 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43307 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43310 \begin_layout Subsection
43312 \begin_inset Index idx
43315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43324 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43331 \begin_layout Standard
43332 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43336 \begin_layout Standard
43337 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43345 This section only deals with the fonts
43349 the \SpecialChar LyX
43351 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43354 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43355 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43366 \begin_layout Standard
43367 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43384 (depends on the system) as its
43387 \begin_inset space ~
43403 \begin_layout Standard
43404 You can change the font size with the
43411 \begin_layout Standard
43416 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43421 points have the size of 1
43422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43426 \begin_inset space ~
43430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43432 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43437 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43442 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43443 \begin_inset space ~
43447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43449 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43456 \begin_layout Standard
43459 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43461 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43462 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43463 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43464 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43465 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43467 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43468 \begin_inset space ~
43474 \begin_layout Subsection
43476 \begin_inset Index idx
43479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43480 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43487 \begin_inset Index idx
43490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43499 \begin_layout Standard
43500 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43501 by choosing an item in the
43502 list and selecting the
43509 \begin_layout Standard
43510 By checking the option
43514 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43517 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43518 \begin_inset space ~
43522 \begin_inset space ~
43527 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43530 \begin_layout Subsection
43532 \begin_inset Index idx
43535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43544 \begin_layout Standard
43545 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43549 \begin_layout Standard
43554 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43555 This feature is described in section
43556 \begin_inset space ~
43560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43562 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43569 \begin_layout Standard
43570 Checking the option
43573 \begin_inset space ~
43577 \begin_inset space ~
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43586 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43589 \begin_layout Section
43591 \begin_inset Index idx
43594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43603 \begin_layout Subsection
43607 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43611 \begin_layout Standard
43614 Cursor follows scrollbar
43616 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43620 \begin_layout Standard
43621 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43622 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43623 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43626 \begin_layout Standard
43629 Scroll below end of document
43631 is self-explanatory.
43634 \begin_layout Standard
43635 In \SpecialChar LyX
43636 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43643 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43645 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43646 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43649 \begin_layout Standard
43652 Sort environments alphabetically
43654 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43657 \begin_layout Standard
43660 Group environments by their category
43662 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43665 \begin_layout Standard
43670 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43681 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43685 \begin_layout Standard
43686 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43691 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43692 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43696 \begin_layout Subsection
43698 \begin_inset Index idx
43701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43708 \begin_inset Index idx
43711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43712 Settings ! Shortcuts
43720 \begin_layout Standard
43725 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43727 Several binding files are available, among them:
43730 \begin_layout Description
43731 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43734 \begin_layout Description
43735 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43747 \begin_layout Description
43748 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43759 \begin_layout Standard
43760 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43765 , and binding files for special languages.
43766 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43771 \begin_inset space \space{}
43775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43783 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43784 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43785 will try to use the appropriate binding
43789 \begin_layout Standard
43790 Some binding files, like
43794 , only have a limited scope.
43795 When looking at the end of the file
43799 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43802 \begin_layout Standard
43806 \begin_inset space ~
43810 \begin_inset space ~
43815 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43816 in the selected key binding file.
43819 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43823 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43828 \begin_inset Index idx
43831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43832 Key Bindings ! Editing
43840 \begin_layout Standard
43841 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43842 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43843 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43844 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43847 Show key-bindings containing
43850 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43851 Insert there for example as keyword
43852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43859 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43860 functions that contain
43861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43869 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43870 All \SpecialChar LyX
43871 functions are also listed in the file
43876 that you will find in the
43883 \begin_layout Standard
43884 For example, to add the shortcut
43892 , select the function and press the
43897 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43898 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43901 \begin_layout Standard
43902 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43903 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43905 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43906 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43908 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43913 \begin_layout Standard
43914 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43917 \begin_layout Standard
43918 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43920 The syntax of the entries is:
43923 \begin_layout Standard
43929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43948 \begin_layout Subsection
43950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43952 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43957 \begin_inset Index idx
43960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43967 \begin_inset Index idx
43970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43971 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43979 \begin_layout Standard
43980 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43981 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43982 provides keyboard maps.
43983 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43984 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43987 \begin_inset space ~
43991 \begin_inset space ~
43996 and select the keyboard map file named
44003 \begin_layout Standard
44012 keyboard map and, if you use the
44016 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44019 arg "keymap-primary"
44025 arg "keymap-secondary"
44028 respectively or toggle between them with
44031 arg "keymap-toggle"
44037 \begin_layout Standard
44038 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44046 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44055 \begin_layout Standard
44056 You can also specify the mouse
44058 Wheel scrolling speed
44061 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44065 Middle mouse button pasting
44067 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44068 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44071 \begin_layout Standard
44079 \begin_inset space ~
44083 \begin_inset space ~
44088 you can select a key for zooming.
44089 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44092 \begin_layout Subsection
44096 \begin_layout Standard
44097 Input completion is described in section
44098 \begin_inset space ~
44102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44104 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44111 \begin_layout Section
44113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44120 \begin_inset Index idx
44123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44130 \begin_inset Index idx
44133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44142 \begin_layout Standard
44143 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44144 are normally determined during
44146 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44149 \begin_layout Description
44151 \begin_inset space ~
44154 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44155 's working directory.
44156 It is the default when you
44167 \begin_inset space ~
44175 \begin_layout Description
44177 \begin_inset space ~
44180 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44182 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44184 \begin_inset space ~
44188 \begin_inset space ~
44196 \begin_layout Description
44198 \begin_inset space ~
44201 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44207 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44211 \begin_inset Newline newline
44215 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44227 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44228 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44236 \begin_layout Description
44238 \begin_inset space ~
44242 \begin_inset Index idx
44245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44251 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44252 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44253 \begin_inset space ~
44257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44259 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44267 will be used to save the backups.
44268 \begin_inset Newline newline
44271 Backup files have the ending
44272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44282 \begin_layout Description
44284 \begin_inset space ~
44287 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44288 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44290 \begin_inset Newline newline
44297 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44303 You can edit this file with the program
44312 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44313 in its preferences under
44316 \begin_inset space ~
44322 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44327 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44329 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44330 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44336 and \SpecialChar LyX
44337 need to be running the same time.
44338 \begin_inset Newline newline
44341 The pipe is also used for the
44346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44352 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44357 \begin_inset Newline newline
44360 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44361 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44362 \begin_inset Newline newline
44378 \begin_layout Description
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44383 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44386 \begin_layout Description
44388 \begin_inset space ~
44391 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44392 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44393 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44396 \begin_layout Description
44398 \begin_inset space ~
44401 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44407 You only need to specify it if you are using
44411 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44413 For \SpecialChar LyX
44418 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44422 \begin_layout Description
44424 \begin_inset space ~
44427 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44428 When \SpecialChar LyX
44429 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44430 to find it on the system.
44431 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44433 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44442 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44443 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44446 \begin_layout Description
44448 \begin_inset space ~
44451 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44452 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44453 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44454 code or in the document
44456 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44458 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44459 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44460 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44461 scanned for the input files.
44462 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44463 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44465 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44466 compilation may fail for some documents.
44469 \begin_layout Section
44473 \begin_layout Standard
44474 Here you can insert your
44483 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44485 \begin_inset space ~
44489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44491 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44495 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44498 \begin_layout Section
44500 \begin_inset Index idx
44503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44504 Language ! Settings
44510 \begin_inset Index idx
44513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44514 Settings ! Language
44522 \begin_layout Subsection
44524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44526 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44533 \begin_layout Description
44535 \begin_inset space ~
44539 \begin_inset space ~
44542 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44544 You can find its actual translation status here:
44545 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44547 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44554 \begin_layout Description
44556 \begin_inset space ~
44559 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44560 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44561 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44562 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44579 The most widespread language package is
44584 \begin_inset Index idx
44587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44594 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44596 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44597 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44598 come with the alternative
44604 \begin_inset Index idx
44607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44609 -packages ! polyglossia
44614 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44615 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44621 The available selections are described in section
44622 \begin_inset space ~
44626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44628 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44635 \begin_layout Description
44637 \begin_inset space ~
44640 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44641 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44642 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44643 An example is the start command
44649 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44651 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44655 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44670 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44675 \begin_layout Description
44677 \begin_inset space ~
44685 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44686 command toggles the package on and off.
44689 \begin_layout Description
44691 \begin_inset space ~
44695 \begin_inset space ~
44698 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44702 \begin_layout Description
44704 \begin_inset space ~
44708 \begin_inset space ~
44711 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44715 \begin_layout Description
44717 \begin_inset space ~
44721 \begin_inset space ~
44724 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44725 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44726 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44728 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44735 \begin_layout Description
44737 \begin_inset space ~
44740 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44742 When this option is not set, the
44745 \begin_inset space ~
44750 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44752 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44755 \begin_inset space ~
44763 \begin_layout Description
44765 \begin_inset space ~
44771 \begin_inset space ~
44777 When it is not set, the
44780 \begin_inset space ~
44785 is set to the end of the document.
44788 \begin_layout Description
44790 \begin_inset space ~
44794 \begin_inset space ~
44797 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44798 language will be underlined in blue.
44801 \begin_layout Description
44803 \begin_inset space ~
44807 \begin_inset space ~
44810 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44811 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44814 \begin_layout Description
44816 \begin_inset space ~
44819 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44820 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44821 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44822 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44825 \begin_layout Subsection
44829 \begin_layout Standard
44830 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44831 \begin_inset space ~
44835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44837 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44844 \begin_layout Section
44848 \begin_layout Subsection
44852 \begin_layout Description
44854 \begin_inset space ~
44857 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44859 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44861 \begin_inset space ~
44867 For a detailed description see section
44869 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44874 \begin_inset space ~
44882 \begin_layout Description
44884 \begin_inset space ~
44890 \begin_layout Description
44892 \begin_inset space ~
44896 \begin_inset space ~
44899 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44902 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44903 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44905 \begin_inset space ~
44911 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44914 \begin_layout Description
44916 \begin_inset space ~
44920 \begin_inset Index idx
44923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44930 \begin_inset Index idx
44933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44934 Settings ! Date format
44939 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44940 \begin_inset Newline newline
44944 \begin_inset Flex URL
44947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44949 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44955 \begin_inset Newline newline
44958 For example the format
44959 \begin_inset Newline newline
44963 \begin_inset Newline newline
44966 prints the date as day/month/year.
44969 \begin_layout Description
44971 \begin_inset space ~
44975 \begin_inset space ~
44978 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44979 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44982 \begin_layout Description
44984 \begin_inset space ~
44987 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44989 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44991 \begin_inset space ~
44997 For a detailed description see section
44999 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45004 \begin_inset space ~
45012 \begin_layout Subsection
45018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45020 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45025 \begin_inset Index idx
45028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45029 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45038 \begin_layout Description
45040 \begin_inset space ~
45048 \begin_inset space ~
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45055 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45060 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45081 are used for Cyrillic.
45082 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45095 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45097 sets up in the background.
45098 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45101 \begin_layout Description
45103 \begin_inset space ~
45107 \begin_inset space ~
45111 \begin_inset space ~
45115 \begin_inset space ~
45118 options They only have an effect when the program
45122 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45125 \begin_layout Standard
45126 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45127 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45128 manuals of the applications.
45131 \begin_layout Description
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45136 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45137 \begin_inset space ~
45141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45143 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45150 \begin_layout Description
45152 \begin_inset space ~
45155 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45156 \begin_inset space ~
45160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45162 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45169 \begin_layout Description
45171 \begin_inset space ~
45174 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45175 \begin_inset space ~
45179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45181 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45188 \begin_layout Description
45194 \begin_inset space ~
45197 command Command for the program
45199 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45202 that is described in the section
45204 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45209 Additional Features
45214 \begin_layout Standard
45215 There are additionally the following options:
45218 \begin_layout Description
45220 \begin_inset space ~
45224 \begin_inset space ~
45228 \begin_inset space ~
45232 \begin_inset space ~
45237 \begin_inset space ~
45240 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45258 to separate folders.
45259 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45261 \begin_inset Index idx
45264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45271 \begin_inset Index idx
45274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45283 \begin_layout Description
45285 \begin_inset space ~
45289 \begin_inset space ~
45293 \begin_inset space ~
45297 \begin_inset space ~
45301 \begin_inset space ~
45305 \begin_inset space ~
45308 changes Removes all manually set
45314 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45315 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45317 \begin_inset space ~
45322 dialog when changing the document class.
45325 \begin_layout Section
45327 \begin_inset space ~
45331 \begin_inset Index idx
45334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45343 \begin_layout Subsection
45345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45347 name "subsec:Converters"
45352 \begin_inset Index idx
45355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45364 \begin_layout Standard
45365 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45366 from one format to another.
45367 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45368 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45375 \begin_inset space ~
45380 field and press the
45385 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45389 \begin_inset space ~
45394 drop-down list, modify the
45398 field and press the
45405 \begin_layout Standard
45408 Converter File Cache
45414 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45416 Maximum Age (in days
45419 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45420 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45423 \begin_layout Standard
45424 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45425 definition, is described in the section
45436 \begin_layout Subsection
45438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45440 name "sec:File-Formats"
45445 \begin_inset Index idx
45448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45455 \begin_inset Index idx
45458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45467 \begin_layout Standard
45468 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45478 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45481 \begin_layout Standard
45482 You can also define the
45484 Default output format
45486 that is used when you use
45488 View, Update, View Master Document
45492 Update Master Document
45498 menu or the toolbar.
45501 \begin_layout Standard
45502 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45513 \begin_layout Standard
45514 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45516 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45517 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45518 This is done by specifying a
45523 More about this is described in the section
45534 \begin_layout Chapter
45535 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45537 \begin_inset Index idx
45540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45549 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45556 \begin_layout Standard
45558 \begin_inset space ~
45562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45564 reference "tab:Units"
45568 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45569 and used in this documentation.
45572 \begin_layout Standard
45573 \begin_inset Float table
45579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45580 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45598 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45606 \begin_inset Tabular
45607 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45608 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45609 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45610 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45611 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45817 scaled point (65536
45818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45892 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45896 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45969 % of original image width
45974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46285 \begin_layout Chapter
46287 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46289 name "chap:Credits"
46296 \begin_layout Standard
46297 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46298 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46301 \begin_layout Itemize
46304 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46307 \begin_layout Itemize
46313 \begin_layout Itemize
46319 \begin_layout Itemize
46325 \begin_layout Itemize
46331 \begin_layout Itemize
46337 \begin_layout Itemize
46343 \begin_layout Itemize
46349 \begin_layout Itemize
46352 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46355 \begin_layout Itemize
46361 \begin_layout Itemize
46367 \begin_layout Itemize
46373 \begin_layout Itemize
46379 \begin_layout Itemize
46385 \begin_layout Itemize
46391 \begin_layout Itemize
46397 \begin_layout Itemize
46403 \begin_layout Itemize
46404 The \SpecialChar LyX
46406 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46415 \begin_layout Standard
46416 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46419 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46426 \begin_layout Bibliography
46427 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46428 LatexCommand bibitem
46434 The \SpecialChar LyX
46436 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46439 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46444 \begin_inset Newline newline
46448 \begin_inset Flex URL
46451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46453 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46461 \begin_layout Bibliography
46462 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46463 LatexCommand bibitem
46464 key "latexcompanion"
46468 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46470 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46471 Companion Second Edition.
46474 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46477 \begin_layout Bibliography
46478 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46479 LatexCommand bibitem
46484 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46487 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46491 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46494 \begin_layout Bibliography
46495 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46496 LatexCommand bibitem
46504 : A Document Preparation System.
46507 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46510 \begin_layout Bibliography
46511 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46512 LatexCommand bibitem
46521 The \SpecialChar TeX
46525 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46528 \begin_layout Bibliography
46529 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46530 LatexCommand bibitem
46535 The \SpecialChar TeX
46537 \begin_inset Newline newline
46541 \begin_inset Flex URL
46544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46546 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46554 \begin_layout Bibliography
46555 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46556 LatexCommand bibitem
46561 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46563 \begin_inset Newline newline
46567 \begin_inset Flex URL
46570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46572 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46580 \begin_layout Bibliography
46581 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46582 LatexCommand bibitem
46588 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46590 name "Documentation"
46591 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46597 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46601 \begin_inset Newline newline
46605 \begin_inset Flex URL
46608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46610 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46618 \begin_layout Bibliography
46619 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46620 LatexCommand bibitem
46626 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46628 name "Documentation"
46629 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46633 how to use the program
46635 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46639 \begin_inset Newline newline
46643 \begin_inset Flex URL
46646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46648 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46656 \begin_layout Bibliography
46657 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46658 LatexCommand bibitem
46664 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46666 name "Documentation"
46667 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46676 \begin_inset Newline newline
46680 \begin_inset Flex URL
46683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46685 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46693 \begin_layout Bibliography
46694 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46695 LatexCommand bibitem
46696 key "makeindex-man"
46701 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46704 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46713 \begin_inset Newline newline
46717 \begin_inset Flex URL
46720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46722 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46730 \begin_layout Bibliography
46731 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46732 LatexCommand bibitem
46738 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46740 name "Documentation"
46741 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46750 \begin_inset Newline newline
46754 \begin_inset Flex URL
46757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46759 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46767 \begin_layout Bibliography
46768 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46769 LatexCommand bibitem
46775 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46777 name "Documentation"
46778 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46782 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46784 \begin_inset Newline newline
46788 \begin_inset Flex URL
46791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46793 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46801 \begin_layout Bibliography
46802 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46803 LatexCommand bibitem
46809 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46811 name "Documentation"
46812 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46816 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46822 \begin_inset Index idx
46825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46827 -packages ! caption
46833 \begin_inset Newline newline
46837 \begin_inset Flex URL
46840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46842 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46850 \begin_layout Bibliography
46851 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46852 LatexCommand bibitem
46858 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46860 name "Documentation"
46861 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46865 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46871 \begin_inset Index idx
46874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46876 -packages ! enumitem
46882 \begin_inset Newline newline
46886 \begin_inset Flex URL
46889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46891 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46899 \begin_layout Bibliography
46900 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46901 LatexCommand bibitem
46907 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46909 name "Documentation"
46910 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46914 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46920 \begin_inset Index idx
46923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46925 -packages ! fancyhdr
46931 \begin_inset Newline newline
46935 \begin_inset Flex URL
46938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46940 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46948 \begin_layout Bibliography
46949 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46950 LatexCommand bibitem
46956 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46958 name "Documentation"
46959 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46963 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46969 \begin_inset Index idx
46972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46974 -packages ! hyperref
46980 \begin_inset Newline newline
46984 \begin_inset Flex URL
46987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46989 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46997 \begin_layout Bibliography
46998 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46999 LatexCommand bibitem
47005 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47007 name "Documentation"
47008 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47012 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47018 \begin_inset Index idx
47021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47023 -packages ! nomencl
47029 \begin_inset Newline newline
47033 \begin_inset Flex URL
47036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47038 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47046 \begin_layout Bibliography
47047 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47048 LatexCommand bibitem
47054 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47056 name "Documentation"
47057 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47061 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47067 \begin_inset Index idx
47070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47072 -packages ! prettyref
47078 \begin_inset Newline newline
47082 \begin_inset Flex URL
47085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47087 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47095 \begin_layout Bibliography
47096 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47097 LatexCommand bibitem
47103 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47105 name "Documentation"
47106 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47110 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47116 \begin_inset Index idx
47119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47121 -packages ! refstyle
47127 \begin_inset Newline newline
47131 \begin_inset Flex URL
47134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47136 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47144 \begin_layout Bibliography
47145 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47146 LatexCommand bibitem
47152 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47155 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47159 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47161 \begin_inset Newline newline
47165 \begin_inset Flex URL
47168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47170 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47178 \begin_layout Bibliography
47179 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47180 LatexCommand bibitem
47186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47189 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47193 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47195 \begin_inset Newline newline
47199 \begin_inset Flex URL
47202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47204 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47212 \begin_layout Bibliography
47213 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47214 LatexCommand bibitem
47220 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47223 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47227 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47228 for Cyrillic languages:
47229 \begin_inset Newline newline
47233 \begin_inset Flex URL
47236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47238 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47246 \begin_layout Bibliography
47247 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47248 LatexCommand bibitem
47254 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47257 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47261 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47263 \begin_inset Newline newline
47267 \begin_inset Flex URL
47270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47272 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47280 \begin_layout Bibliography
47281 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47282 LatexCommand bibitem
47288 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47291 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47295 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47297 \begin_inset Newline newline
47301 \begin_inset Flex URL
47304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47306 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47314 \begin_layout Bibliography
47315 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47316 LatexCommand bibitem
47322 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47325 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47329 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47331 \begin_inset Newline newline
47335 \begin_inset Flex URL
47338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47340 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47348 \begin_layout Bibliography
47349 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47350 LatexCommand bibitem
47356 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47359 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47363 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47365 \begin_inset Newline newline
47369 \begin_inset Flex URL
47372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47374 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47382 \begin_layout Bibliography
47383 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47384 LatexCommand bibitem
47390 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47393 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47397 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47399 \begin_inset Newline newline
47403 \begin_inset Flex URL
47406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47408 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47416 \begin_layout Bibliography
47417 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47418 LatexCommand bibitem
47424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47427 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47431 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47433 \begin_inset Newline newline
47437 \begin_inset Flex URL
47440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47442 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47450 \begin_layout Bibliography
47451 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47452 LatexCommand bibitem
47458 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47461 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47465 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47467 \begin_inset Newline newline
47471 \begin_inset Flex URL
47474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47476 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47484 \begin_layout Bibliography
47485 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47486 LatexCommand bibitem
47492 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47495 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47499 about new features in
47505 \begin_inset Newline newline
47509 \begin_inset Flex URL
47512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47514 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47522 \begin_layout Standard
47523 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47557 \begin_inset Note Note
47560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47567 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47568 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47569 bibliography is the second one:
47577 \begin_layout Standard
47578 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47579 LatexCommand bibtex
47580 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47581 options "biblio/alphadin"
47588 \begin_layout Standard
47589 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47593 \begin_layout Standard
47594 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47595 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47601 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47602 LatexCommand printindex